You are on page 1of 257

MASTER CAM DESIGN

ENTERING DATA

When Mastercam prompts for data entry such as a value for height, width, radius, or angle, you can take
one of the following actions. These actions apply to both the prompt area and dialog box fields.

¨ Press either mouse button or press [Enter] to accept the displayed value.

¨ Type the data directly into the text box, then press [Enter].

¨ Type the letter of a shortcut method, then press [Enter].

Notes:

¨ Mastercam remembers the previous XYZ coordinates that you entered. To use these values again,
press [Enter] instead of entering a value for each of the coordinates.

¨ Mastercam accepts formulas as well as numbers. You can use addition [+], subtraction [-],
multiplication [*], division [/], and parentheses [( )]. Use ordinary algebraic notation [i.e., x1+2/3y(1-
6*.025)/8z-1/2].

¨ Wherever Mastercam accepts real numbers and formulas, you can enter an angle value in
degrees/minutes/seconds or gradians/radians formats. Use the following data entry tokens, always placing
the token after the numeral:

degrees=d
minutes = ‘
seconds = "
gradians = g
radians = r

¨ When prompted for a real value (a length, a distance, or an angle) at the prompt line, you can use
the up and down arrow keys to display previously entered values.

Data entry shortcuts

Data entry shortcuts let you enter data that you gather from the graphics area into the prompt area or any
text box that asks for a real (or decimal) number. To use a data entry shortcut, enter the letter of the
shortcut method, then click the point that you want in the graphics window.
The shortcuts appear next to the prompt area as shown below. Clicking right in a text box displays a quick
reference of the shortcuts and their meanings.

X X coordinate value for a selected point. Press [X] then choose the point whose X coordinate you
want to use.

1
Y Y coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Y] then choose the point whose Y coordinate you
want to use.
Z Z coordinate value for a selected point. Press [Z] then choose the point whose Z coordinate you
want to use.
R Radius of a selected arc. Press [R] then select the arc whose radius you want to use, or select a
radius dimension.
D Diameter of a selected arc. Press [D] then select the arc whose diameter you want to use, or select
a diameter dimension.

L Length of a line, arc, or spline. Press [L] then select the entity whose length you want to use. Other
methods for entering a length: select a linear format dimension, a witness line, or the distance between
two witness lines; select text to enter text height as a length measurement.
S Distance between two points. Press [S] then select the two points.
A Angle. Displays the Angle menu which provides options for defining an angle value.

? Displays the quick reference to the data entry shortcuts. In a text box that accepts a real (decimal)
number, right-click to display the quick reference.
Defining angle values for data entry
1 Line
Uses the angle of a single line that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise
direction from the horizontal line of the current Cplane.
1 line also lets you select an angular dimension to obtain an angle value.
2 Lines
Uses the angle formed by two lines that you select. Mastercam calculates the angle in a counterclockwise
direction from the first selected line to the second selected line.
P ts ( 2 or 3 )
Enter two or three points to determine an angle. Enter two points, then press [Esc] to calculate the angle of
the line that runs between the two points in a counterclockwise direction from the horizontal axis of the
current Cplane. When entering three points, the first point becomes the pivot point (equivalent to an arc
center), and the next two points define an angular distance.
Arc sweep
An arc sweep is the distance in degrees from the start angle to its end angle. The system prompts you to
select the arc whose sweep angle you want to use.
Value
Lets you type a value for an angle. Values are in decimal degrees by default, but can be entered in
degree/minute/seconds format or gradians/radians format. Use the following data entry tokens, always
placing the token after the numeral:
degrees=d
minutes = ‘
seconds = "
gradians = g
radians = r
Examples:
25d11’5" 25g 200r

2
POINT ENTRY

Entering Points

Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to enter points. By entering points you
define positions in 3D space. You can enter points using one of two methods: Mastercam's AutoCursor™
feature or the Point Entry menu. When you enter a point, Mastercam projects the selected position onto
the current construction plane. If the current Cplane is set to 3D, Mastercam uses the actual position of the
selected point.

About Auto Cursor

The AutoCursor™ is a point entry feature that is available whenever Mastercam displays the Point Entry
menu and prompts you to enter a point. AutoCursor eliminates menu steps by detecting and snapping to
points as you move the cursor over geometry on the screen.

Endpoints and midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all detected and
highlighted by AutoCursor. If AutoCursor doesn’t detect any points, the AutoCursor defaults to the Sketch
Point Entry menu option, letting you enter a point at any position.
At any time while AutoCursor is active, you can override the auto-selected point by using the mouse or
keyboard shortcut keys to access Point Entry menu options. In complex geometry there may be more than
one point that lies within the detection range of the cursor. In these cases, the AutoCursor uses the order
shown below to detect and snap to points.

1. Point entities

2. Endpoints of curves or lines

3. Midpoints of curves or lines

4. Quadrant points of arcs

5. Centers of arcs

6. Real curve or line intersections (not intersections projected by Mastercam)

7. Points on the active selection grid

Note: AutoCursor does not recognize endpoints on surfaces. To enter a point at the endpoint of a surface,
you must use the Endpoints option on the Point Entry menu.
AutoCursor is active by default. To disable AutoCursor, choose Main Menu, Screen, Config, select the
Screen tab, and clear the Use AutoCursor in Point Selection checkbox.

Turning AutoCursor on or off

1. Right-click in the graphics window to display the menu.

2. Choose AutoCursor. A check appears next to the AutoCursor menu selection when it is on.

3. Right click and choose AutoCursor to turn it off.

3
Note: You can also choose Screen, Next menu, and toggle AutoCursor to Y.

Entering a point using AutoCursor

1. Activate AutoCursor from the right-click menu.

2. Move the cursor over geometry on the screen. As Mastercam detects and snaps to points, it
displays a temporary open-square over the point and highlights the corresponding Point Entry menu
option.

3. When the cursor snaps to the point you want, left-click to enter the point.

Entering a point using XYZ coordinates

You can enter a point using XYZ coordinates as an alternative to selecting a point with the cursor or using
AutoCursor™. Mastercam accepts coordinates that use commas as separators (5,3,1) or that use the letter
of the coordinate (x5y3z1). If you enter values for just one or two coordinates (x1 or x1y2), Mastercam uses
the coordinate values of the last point you entered for any axes you omitted. If you are entering a point for
the first time in the current Mastercam session, the system uses zero as the default value for any
coordinates that you do not enter.

1. Once in the Point Entry menu, type the coordinate in either format described above. As soon as
you begin typing, the prompt area opens a data entry field.

2. Press [Enter] to enter a point at the coordinate

Entering a point at the system origin

Choosing Origin from the Point Entry menu places a point at the system origin. Mastercam places a point or
sets a point position at the construction origin.

System origin

In the Cartesian coordinate system, the intersection of the X, Y, and Z axes (0,0,0) is known as the system
origin. Often the system origin corresponds with the lower left corner of the part or the stock to be
machined. The origin may also correspond with the 0,0,0 position on the milling machine, which is a known
reference point for all machine moves. The system origin is fixed and cannot be changed.
In Mastercam, the graphics view axes markers (also called the viewport axes markers) always refer to the
system coordinates, which use 0,0,0 as the origin. The system coordinates are also referred to as world
coordinates. You can view the system origin on screen by pressing [F9]. The system origin is shown in
brown (default color).

Construction origin

The current Cplane has an origin, called the construction origin. In a new MC9 file, both the system and
construction origins are set to 0,0,0. You set a new construction origin by pressing [Alt+ O] when in the
Cplane menu and entering a coordinate or selecting a point in the graphics window. The construction origin
remains set at the point that you choose until you change it, even when you change the Cplane (with one
exception – when you retrieve a named view as described below). You can view the construction origin on
screen by pressing [F9]. The construction origin is shown in green (default color).

4
An advantage of the construction origin is that it simplifies creating or translating geometry. Setting a
construction origin relative to the current Cplane lets you think about XYZ coordinates with respect to the
current Cplane only, not the system origin. This benefit becomes apparent when working on a large part
where the system origin may not be visible in the graphics window. You can set the construction origin to
be located near the area on the part where you are working and avoid the complication of calculating
coordinates in reference to an origin that may not be on screen.

You can save user-defined Cplanes as named views. An advantage of using named views is that you can
associate an origin to a plane. When you change the Cplane to a named view, the construction origin
changes to the origin linked to the view. For more information, see Creating a named view.
Note: You can set the colors of the system and construction origins on the Screen tab of the System
Configuration dialog box (Screen, Config, Screen tab, System colors).

Entering a point at the center of an arc

1. Choose Center from the Point Entry menu.

2. Select an arc. Mastercam highlights the point at center of the arc.

Entering a point at the endpoint of an entity

1. Choose Endpoint from the Point Entry menu.

2. Select an entity. Mastercam highlights the entity’s endpoint.

Notes:

¨ When selecting a surface entity, Mastercam enters a point at the closest corner.

¨ When selecting a trimmed surface, Mastercam calculates the surface edges of the base surface,
not the trimmed surface. Therefore, the point may be created outside of the trimmed surface.

Entering a point at the intersection of two curves

The Intersec option lets you enter a point at the intersection of two curves (lines, arcs, or splines) in the
current construction plane. Since two curves may intersect at multiple positions, be sure to select each
curve near the intersection where you want to enter a point.
When lines or arcs do not intersect, Mastercam calculates an extension to one or both entities and places a
point where the entities could intersect. However, Mastercam cannot calculate a predictable extension to a
spline. Intersec only works with a spline that could be intersected by a line or arc.

1. Choose Intersec from the Point Entry menu.

2. Choose the first curve, then choose a second curve that intersects the first. Mastercam highlights
the intersection point.

Entering a point at the midpoint of a curve

This option lets you enter a point at the midpoint of a curve (line, arc, or spline). A midpoint is the point
calculated halfway along the length of a curve.

5
1. Choose Midpoint from the Point Entry menu.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline. Mastercam highlights the midpoint of the selected curve.

Entering a point at the position of an existing point

1. Choose Point from the Point Entry menu.

2. Select a point. Mastercam highlights the selected point.

Entering a point at the last entered position

From the Point Entry menu, choose Last. Mastercam highlights the point previously entered.

Entering a point relative to the position of another point

The Relative option lets you choose a point based on another point’s position.

1. Choose Relative from the Point Entry menu.

2. Enter a point. The Point Entry: Relative menu displays.

3. To enter a distance using XYZ coordinates, choose Rectang from the menu. Type the coordinate in
the prompt area, then press [Enter] to define the point.

To enter a distance using polar coordinates, choose Polar. Type a value for distance (vector length) and
press [Enter]. Type a value for angle, then press [Enter] to define the point.

Entering a point at a quadrant position on an arc

1. Choose Quadrant from the Point Entry menu.

2. Move the cursor close to the 0, 90, 180, or 270 degree quadrant point of the arc, then press the left
mouse button. Mastercam highlights the closest quadrant point.

Sketching a point at any position

The Sketch option lets you enter a point freehand, using the cursor to pick a position in the graphics
window. The point is entered at the location where the cursor projects onto the Cplane. You can use the
selection gridto enter points more precisely.

1. Choose Sketch from the Point Entry menu.

2. Move the cursor to a location on the screen where you want to enter a point, then left-click to
highlight the point at that position.

Setting up a grid for point entry

The selection grid is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to when you sketch a point.
Snapping to the selection grid provides a finer level of precision than sketching points freehand.

6
When you press [Alt+G] or choose Screen, Next menu, Sel. grid, the Selection Grid Parameters dialog box
opens to give you options for activating, deactivating, or customizing the appearance of the selection grid.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Next menu, Sel. Grid. The Selection Grid dialog box opens.

2. Check Active grid to turn on the selection grid.

3. Check Visible grid to make the selection grid visible.

Note: Be sure to check both Active grid and Visible grid to view the activated grid.

4. Enter values (inches or millimeters) in the Spacing X and Y fields for the distance between the grid
points. These values define the length and width of the grid cells.

5. Enter an Origin XY coordinate for center of the grid or choose Select and choose a point from the
graphics window.

6. Enter a color number or choose the Color button to select the color for the grid points and origin
marker.

7. Enter a value (inches or millimetres) for Size to set the overall length and width of the grid (it can
extend beyond the screen boundaries).

8. Choose Test to view the grid settings before saving them. Press [Esc] to return to the Selection Grid
dialog box.

9. Choose OK to save the settings.

Notes:

¨ The grid settings persist for the current MC9 file. To save the grid settings in the configuration file,
choose Screen, Configure, and choose the selection grid button from the Screen tab. Follow the procedure
above to set up a default selection grid.

Entity Selection

Throughout your work in Mastercam the system prompts you to select entities. When you have the option
to select more than one entity, Mastercam displays the Entity Selection menu which provides several
selection methods. The selection methods available vary according to the function that you are using. The
system highlights selected entities in white. The highlight color can be changed in the Screen tab of the
System Configuration dialog box.
The simplest way to select entities is to click the mouse in the graphics window when the Entity Selection
menu displays. When the cursor is very close to an entity, the entity highlights showing you what would be
selected if you clicked at that position on the screen. The auto-highlight feature can be turned on and off in
the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog or in the right-click menu.

When working with complex geometry, the options in the Entity selection menu make selection easier and
quicker than picking one entity at a time.

7
Selection Tips

The following tips can aid your selection of entities as you work in Mastercam:

¨ Rapid-fire selection: To select single entities quickly, hold down both mouse buttons and move the
cursor over geometry that you want to select. When you finish selecting entities, release the mouse
buttons.

¨ To narrow the selection of entities to only one level of geometry at a time, use the Mask function
and choose Attributes from the Selection Mask dialog box.

¨ To quickly simplify a crowded screen and narrow your selection of entities, use the Hide function.

¨ To select all entities for a single operation, choose All, Entities from the Entity Selection menu.

Unselecting entities

1. Choose Unselect from the Entity Selection menu.

2. Click on highlighted entities to unselect them.

3. When finished, press [Esc] to return to the Entity Selection menu.

Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so that they form the foundation of a
toolpath, surface, or solid. When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs,
and splines) or points which have adjoining endpoints. Chaining differs from other selection methods
because it associates order and direction to the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the
way Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.

Most toolpaths require geometry to be chained. Usually you chain the geometry that is used in a single
operation, such as a contour toolpath or pocket toolpath. Chaining also determines the direction of tool
travel during machining. However, you can also chain together separate sets of entities to be cut in a single
operation. For example you can chain together the entities for separate parts to be cut from the same
workpiece in the same operation.
Many surface and solid creation methods require geometry to be chained. Chaining identifies the geometry
that makes up the surface sections or boundaries. Chaining is also used to define entities for several
Analyze and Create functions and is an efficient method for entity selection even when a specific order is
not required.

About chains

Chaining activates entities in a specific order in preparation for a function such as toolpath or surface
creation. For example, when creating a contour toolpath, you chain the entities that form the shape that
you want to be machined. Unchained entities won’t be included in the toolpath.
Mastercam highlights chains in the same color as selected entities. You can change the select color using
the System Colors button in the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen, Configure).

8
Chains also have these characteristics:

Type (open or closed)


Direction
Order
Branch points

Chains are open or closed. In an open chain the start and endpoints are different coordinates. Examples of
open chains are single lines or arcs. An open chain may consist of a single entity or several contiguous
entities.
In a closed chain the start and endpoints share the same coordinates. Closed chains typically consist of
several entities that have adjacent endpoints and that form a closed boundary. Examples of closed chains
are rectangles or circles.

Chaining direction

All chains have a direction. Direction for closed chains is either clockwise or counterclockwise, while the
direction for open chains points toward one of the chain endpoints. The chaining direction determines the
direction of tool movement in a toolpath.
In surface creation, Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchronize the chains to create a smooth,
regular surface. Errors in establishing chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that can’t be
machined.

The arrow in the following graphic shows the counterclockwise chaining direction for a closed chain. The
chain starts at the base point of the arrow.

9
Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains than closed chains. In an open chain,
the start point is placed at the end of the chain closest to the selection point and the chain direction points
to the opposite end of the chain.

In a closed chain, Mastercam assigns chain direction based on the Direction for Closed Chains parameters
in the Chaining Options dialog box. Closed chains are assigned either a clockwise or counterclockwise
direction regardless of where you position the cursor when selecting the chain.
For more control over the direction of closed chains, check the box labeled Use cursor position for manual
selection. When enabled, this option sets chaining direction relative to the position of the cursor when you
select an entity to be chained.

Reversing chaining direction for inner chains

Use this chaining option to swap the chaining direction when chains are surrounded by an outer boundary.
This chaining option is useful for geometry that consists of inside and outside shapes and provides an
automated method of reversing the cutter offset from the inside shape to the outside shape. In the graphic
below, the inside chains represent an opening which is cut out, leaving the inside chain as scrap. Therefore,
the cutter needs to be offset to the inside of the chain while the surrounding chain requires the cutter to
be offset to the outside of the chain.

10
Chaining order

Some Mastercam functions that require chaining produce unexpected results if the entities are chained in
an order that prevents Mastercam from properly synchronizing the chains. Examples of these functions are
loft, coons, ruled, and swept surfaces. A coons surface chaining, for instance, requires separate curves to
define along and across edges.
When chaining for toolpaths, order is important to ensure minimal rapid moves. You can check rapid
moves with the Backplot function which represents rapid moves in yellow. The Chain Manager in the
Operations Manager can then be used to re-order the chains.

Other functions that use chaining don’t require that the entities get chained in any particular order.
Examples of these functions include the Xform commands Rotate and Mirror, and the Delete command. In
these cases, chaining is a selection method and order is irrelevant.

Branch points

A branch point is the position where the endpoints of two or more entities meet. Branch points indicate
where there are different paths that the chain can take. When Mastercam encounters a branch point
during chaining, it prompts you to choose the path for the chain to follow.

Mastercam only considers a position a branch point when multiple entity endpoints meet. Entities can
intersect without having their endpoints meet. If you need to create a branch point at the intersection of
two entities, you need to break both entities at their intersection point. Use either the Modify, Trim or
Modify, Break command to divide the intersecting entities at a specific point.

Mastercam also uses branch points as a method for synchronizing chains. You can set the synchronization
method in the Chaining Options dialog box.

Chaining options

Use the Chaining options dialog box to set default values for a number of choices that affect how you work
with chains. The values you select in the Chaining options dialog box will be in effect whenever you create a
chain in the current file. You can see the current values in the prompt area whenever a chaining menu
appears. To reach the Chaining options dialog box, select the Options command in several of the chaining
menus. The topics below describe the individual options.

11
You can also set a number of system chaining defaults that will apply to all files. These are set by way of the
Chaining options button on the Screen tab of the System Configuration dialog box (Screen, Configure).

Chaining tips

¨ Mastercam supports Auto-Partial chaining. This eliminates the need to repeatedly choose Partial
from the Chaining Methods menu when partial chaining.

¨ If the chain stops unexpectedly, use Analyze, Chain to check for overlapping entities. You can then
use Modify functions to trim adjacent entities together in order to chain them.

¨ To reselect the previous chained entities, for example when correcting a surface that didn’t
generate properly, use Last from the Chaining Methods menu. Mastercam rechains the entities so that you
can edit the chains and correct chaining direction or order. Last prevents you from having to completely
rechain the entities.

Creating entities

The Create menu gives you options for creating geometric and drafting entities. You can access the Create
menu by choosing Create from the Main Menu. The functions on the Create menu can be divided into
three categories:
Note: For information on setting default design and drafting values, see Setting default CAD values. Many
of these values can be set during operation; however, some are unique and can only be set prior to
operation using the Screen, Configure function.

Creating points

The Point menu gives you options for creating point entities. You can access the Point menu by choosing
Main Menu, Create, Point. Click on the topics below for more information.

Creating a point at any position in the graphics window


1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Position.

2. Enter a point to create a point at that position.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional points.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating points at fixed intervals along a curve

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Along ent.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. In the prompt area, enter the number of points to create along the entity.

12
Note: The default value is an approximation based on the entity length divided by .1 inches for English
units and 2.0 mm for metric units.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points along additional entities.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating points at the node points of a parametric spline

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Node pts.

2. Select a parametric spline.

3. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional parametric splines.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating points at the control points of a NURBS spline

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Cpts NURBS.

2. Select a NURBS spline.

3. Repeat step 2 to create points for additional NURBS splines.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a point at any position on a curve or surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Dynamic.

2. Select a line, arc, spline, or surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity.

3. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position, then left-click to create a point at that position.

Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the
cursor crosshairs over the point, then left-click.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional points on the same entity.

5. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 and 3 to create points on a different entity, or press [Esc] twice to
exit the function.

Creating a point at any position on a solid face

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Dynamic.

2. Choose Solid face.

3. Set Faces to Y, then select a solid face. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected face.

13
4. Move the base of the arrow to a desired position, then left-click to create a point at that position.

Note: To create the point at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move the
cursor crosshairs over the point, then left-click.

5. Repeat step 4 to create additional points on the same face.

6. Press [Esc] and repeat steps 2 through 4 to create points on a different face, or press [Esc] twice to
exit the function.

Creating a point at a defined distance along a curve

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Length.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline close to one endpoint.

Note: Mastercam will create the point at a defined distance from the endpoint closest to the cursor
position when you select the entity.

3. In the prompt area, enter the distance to create the point from the selected endpoint.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional points at different distances.

Note: Entering the same value twice in a row exits you from the function.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating points at the intersections of a slice plane with curves

This function slices selected curves with a plane and creates points at positions where the plane intersects
the curves. You also have options to create the points at offset positions, to create points at a defined
spacing interval from the intersections, and to trim the curves to the resulting points.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Slice.

2. Select one or more lines, arcs, and/or splines, then choose Done.

3. Define the slice plane. Mastercam displays a temporary indicator of the plane in the graphics
window.

4. Set parameters on the Slice menu, then choose Do it.

5. If prompted, select one of the highlighted entities, move the base of the display arrow to the side
of the curves to keep after trimming, then left-click.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional points.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

14
Projecting points onto surfaces and solids

You can use this function to create points at the projection positions, create lines along the projection
paths, and/or save the projection data to a file.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Srf project.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. At the prompt, choose Yes to select existing point entities or No to enter points at any position in
the graphics window.

4. If Yes was selected in step 3, select one or more points, then press Done. If No was selected in step
3, enter one or more points, then press [Esc].

5. Set parameters on the Projection menu, then choose Do it.

6. If prompted, enter a file name, then choose Save and continue with the remaining steps.
Otherwise, continue with step 10.

7. If prompted that a file of the same name already exists, choose Append to add the current data to
the end of the existing file or Overwrite to replace the existing data with the current data.

8. Type a comment to display at the top of the file (optional), then press [Enter] to view the file.

9. Close the file.

10. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the number of points that were successfully projected.
Press [Enter] to continue.

11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 to project additional points.

12. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a point at a perpendicular distance from a curve

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Perp/dist.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline in the graphics window.

3. Enter a point on or near the selected curve where you want the perpendicular distance to be
calculated.

4. In the prompt area, enter a value for the distance from the curve that you want the point to be
created.

Note: Entering a zero value creates the point directly on the curve.

5. If you entered a value greater than zero in step 4, Mastercam displays a temporary line on both
sides of the curve. Select the line on the side of the curve where you want to create the point.

15
Creating points in a grid pattern

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Next menu, Grid.

2. Set parameters on the Grid menu, then choose Do it.

3. Enter a point to position the lower left corner of the grid.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional grids.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating points in a bolt circle pattern

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Next menu, Bolt circle.

2. Set parameters on the Bolt Circle menu, then choose Do it.

3. Enter a point to position the center of the bolt circle.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional bolt circles.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating points at the center of selected arcs

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Point, Next menu, Small arcs.

2. Select one or more arcs in the graphics window, then choose Done.

3. Set parameters on the From Small Arcs/Circles menu, then choose Do it.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional points, or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Displaying and saving entity endpoints

Choosing the Endpoints option on the Screen menu lets you view and create point entities at the endpoints
of all visible lines, arcs, and splines. This is useful for determining the boundaries of an individual curve in a
chain of curves.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Endpoints. Mastercam displays the points for you to view and prompts
you to save them.

2. Choose Save dups to change the setting as follows:

¨ Set to Y to create all displayed points, even if duplicate points result.

¨ Set to N to create a single point at each endpoint position and discard any duplicate points that
occupy the same position in the graphics window.
Note: Save Dups has no effect if you discard the points (see step 3).
3. Choose Yes to create and save the actual points, or choose No to discard them.

16
Creating lines
The Line menu gives you options for creating line entities. You can access the Line menu by choosing Main
Menu, Create, Line. Click on the topics below for more information.

Creating a horizontal line

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Horizontal.

2. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line.

3. In the prompt area, enter a value to position the line on the vertical axis.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal lines.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a vertical line

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Vertical.

2. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line.

3. In the prompt area, enter a value to position the line on the horizontal axis.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical lines.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a line between any two points

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Endpoints.

2. Enter two points for the endpoints of the line.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional lines.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Multi.

2. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line.

3. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line.

Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines.

17
5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating polar lines

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Polar.

2. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the line.

3. In the prompt area, enter the angle of the line.

4. Enter the length of the line.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional lines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating tangent lines

The Tangent Line menu gives you options for creating lines that are tangent to arcs and splines. You can
access the Tangent Line menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Line, Tangent. Click on the topics below for
more information.

Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline at a defined angle

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Tangent, Angle.

2. Select an arc or spline.

Note: Select the entity close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may
be possible.

3. In the prompt area, enter the angle of the line.

4. Enter the length of the line.

5. Select the line to keep.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity.

Creating a line tangent to two arcs

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Tangent, 2 arcs.

2. Select two arcs.

Note: Select both entities close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions
may be possible.

18
3. Repeat step 2 to create additional tangent lines.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity.

Creating a line tangent to an arc or spline through a point

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Tangent, Point.

2. Select an arc or spline.

3. Enter a point for the tangent line to pass through.

Note: Enter the point close to where you want to create the tangent line because multiple solutions may
be possible.

4. In the prompt area, enter the length of the line.

5. If prompted, select the line to keep.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional tangent lines.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity.

Creating perpendicular lines

The Perpendicular menu gives you options for creating lines that are perpendicular to curves. You can
access the Perpendicular menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Line, Perpendclr. Click on the topics below
for more information.

Creating a line perpendicular to a curve through a point

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Perpendclr, Point.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. Enter a point for the perpendicular line to pass through.

4. In the prompt area, enter the length of the line.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional perpendicular lines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

19
Creating a line perpendicular to a line and tangent to an arc

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Perpendclr, Arc.

2. Select a line for the new line to be perpendicular to.

3. Select an arc for the perpendicular line to be tangent to.

4. In the prompt area, enter the length of the line.

5. Select the line to keep.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional perpendicular lines.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity.

Creating parallel lines


The Parallel menu gives you options for creating parallel lines. Mastercam creates each parallel line by
offsetting an existing line by a defined distance or through a point. You can access the Parallel menu by
choosing Main Menu, Create, Line, Parallel. Click on the topics below for more information.

Creating a parallel line using an offset distance and direction

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Parallel, Side/dist.

2. Select a line.

3. Indicate the offset direction by left-clicking on one side or the other of the selected line.

4. In the prompt area, enter the offset distance.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2.

Creating a parallel line through a point

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Parallel, Point.

2. Select a line.

3. Enter a point for the parallel line to pass through.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional parallel lines.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.


Note: The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2.

20
Creating a parallel line tangent to an arc

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Parallel, Arc.

2. Select a line.

3. Select an arc for the parallel line to be tangent to.

4. Select the line to keep.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional parallel lines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ The line may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity.

¨ The parallel line is the same length as the reference line selected in step 2.

Offsetting a single curve

When Mastercam offsets a single curve, it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. The direction is
perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Offset.

2. On the Offset dialog box, select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy.

3. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

4. Select a line, arc, or spline in the graphics window.

5. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. Mastercam
offsets the curve.

Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box, Mastercam moves the entity in
the opposite direction from the one you indicate.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may
cause the spline to self-intersect.

¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle, depending on the offset direction.
Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller
circle.

21
¨ The Create, Line, Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. For more
information, see Creating parallel lines.

Creating a bisecting line or a midline

Note: For intersecting lines, Mastercam creates a bisecting line. For parallel lines, Mastercam creates a
midline, which begins midway between the start of the first selected line and the closest endpoint of the
second selected line.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Bisect.

2. Select two lines.

3. In the prompt area, enter the length of the line.

4. If prompted, select the bisecting line to keep.

Note: If the intersection point is out of view, press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional bisecting lines or midlines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a line at the closest position between two curves or a curve and a point

Note: For intersecting lines, Mastercam creates a point.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Closest.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. Select a point, line, arc, or spline. Mastercam displays the length of the resulting entity in the
prompt area.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lines.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

CREATING ARCS
The Arc menu gives you options for creating arc entities (including circles). Mastercam calculates arcs in a
counterclockwise direction. You can access the Arc menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Arc. Click on the
topics below for more information.

Creating polar arcs

The Polar Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs using polar coordinates. You can access the Polar
Arc menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Arc, Polar. Click on the topics below for more information.

22
Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and start/end angles

Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Polar, Center pt.

2. Enter a point for the center of the arc.

3. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

4. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees.

5. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a polar arc with a defined center point and by sketching the start/end angles

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Polar, Sketch.

2. Enter a point for the center of the arc.

3. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

4. Enter a point for the start angle of the arc.

5. Enter a point for the end angle of the arc.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: You can create a full circle by entering the same point for the initial and final angles.

Creating a polar arc with a defined starting point


1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Polar, Start pt.

2. Enter a point for the starting point of the arc.

3. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

4. Enter the initial angle of the arc in degrees.

5. Enter the final angle of the arc in degrees.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.


Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle.

23
Creating a polar arc with a defined ending point

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Polar, End pt.

2. Enter a point for the ending point of the arc.

3. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

4. Enter the start angle of the arc in degrees.

5. Enter the end angle of the arc in degrees.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: You can create a full circle by entering 0 for the initial angle and 360 for the final angle.

Creating an arc with a defined radius and endpoints

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Endpoints.

2. Enter two points for the endpoints of the arc.

3. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

4. Select the arc to keep.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The radius that you enter in step 3 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the
two points that you enter.

Creating an arc with three defined edge points

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, 3 points.

2. Enter three unique points.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: No more than two of the points that you enter in step 2 can be collinear.

24
Creating tangent arcs

The Tangent Arc menu gives you options for creating arcs that are tangent to curves and points. You can
access the Tangent Arc menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent. Click on the topics below for
more information.

Creating an arc tangent to one arc or line

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent, 1 entity.

2. Select a line or arc.

3. Enter a point for the arc to be tangent with the selected entity.

4. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

5. Select the arc to keep.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ If the point that you enter in step 3 does not lie on the selected line or arc, the system projects the
point along the normal vector of the selected entity.

¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entity.

Creating a circle tangent to two curves

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent, 2 entities.

2. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the circle.

3. Select two lines, arcs, or splines.

4. If prompted, select the circle to keep.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional circles.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ The radius that you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the
closest points on the two curves that you select in step 3.

¨ You cannot create the arc between two parallel lines.

¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities.

25
¨ While similar to filleting two curves, this function always creates a full circle and does not give you
the option to trim the selected entities

Creating an arc tangent to three points, lines, and arcs

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent, 3 ents/pts.

2. Select three points, lines, and/or arcs.

Note: Choose Point entry to enter tangent points in the graphics window.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional arcs.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot create a tangent arc between three parallel lines.

¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected entities.

Creating a circle tangent to a line using a defined center line

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent, Center line.

2. Select a line for the circle to be tangent to.

3. Select a line to pass through the center of the circle.

4. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the circle.

5. Select the circle to keep.

Note: If the circles are out of view, press [Alt+F1] to fit the geometry to the screen.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional circles.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ The lines you select in steps 2 and 3 cannot be parallel to one another.

¨ The circle may be created on an extended portion of the selected line.

Creating an arc tangent to a line or arc with a defined edge point

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent, Point.

26
2. Select a line or arc for the arc to be tangent to.

3. Enter a point for the arc to pass through.

4. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the arc.

5. Select the arc to keep.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ The radius that you enter in step 4 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the
entity selected in step 2 and the point entered in step 3 at the closest pass between them.

¨ The arc may be created on an extended portion of the selected line.

Creating an arc tangent to a curve at any position

This function creates an arc that is less than or equal to 180 degrees.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Tangent, Dynamic.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the selected entity.

3. Move the base of the arrow to a desired point, then left-click.

Note: To set the tangent point to the position of an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the
cursor crosshairs overt the point, then left-click.

4. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the arc. Mastercam adjusts the direction of the arc, if
necessary, to maintain 180 degrees or less.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to create additional arcs.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a circle using two defined edge points

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Circ 2 pts.

2. Enter two points to lie on the edge of the circle. Mastercam calculates 180 degrees between the
points and fits a circle to them.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

27
Creating a circle using three defined edge points

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Circ 3 pts.

2. Enter three points to lie on the edge of the circle.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional circles.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a circle with a defined center point and radius

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Circ pt+rad.

2. In the prompt area, enter the radius of the circle.

3. Enter a point for the center of the circle.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a circle with a defined center point and diameter

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Circ pt+dia.

2. In the prompt area, enter the diameter of the circle.

3. Enter a point for the center of the circle.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a circle with defined center and edge points

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Arc, Circ pt+edg.

2. Enter a point for the center of the circle.

3. Enter a point to lie on the edge of the circle.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional circles.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Automating and formatting arc center lines

You can automatically mark the center of arcs as you create them. The mark, which can be either a point or
crosshair, is real geometry that can be selected and manipulated like any other geometry. You can control

28
color, level, and style and crosshair size. Unless you change the settings, the mark uses the current system
color, level, and line style.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

2. Choose the CAD Settings tab.

3. Choose Center Lines (arcs) The Automatic Center Lines dialog box opens.

4. Select Point to mark the arc center with a point, or Lines to mark the center with a crosshair.

5. To use a color different from the current system color, check Define in the Color group and either
enter a color number or choose the color button to select a color from the palette.

6. To place the mark on a different level, check Define in the Level group and either enter a level
number or choose Select and select a level from the Levels dialog box.

7. To control crosshair line style, do one of the following:

¨ Check Current to use the current system line style.

¨ Check Define, then either enter a line style number or choose Select and select a style.

8. To control crosshair line length, do one of the following:

¨ Choose Percentage of diameter and enter a percent value. The crosshair line length will be the
percentage of the arc diameter you entered.

¨ Choose Fixed length and enter a line length in current units.

9. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

Creating rectangular-shaped geometry

The Rectangular Shape menu gives you options for creating rectangles and other geometric shapes
(Obround, Single D, Double D, and Ellipse) that are composed of lines and/or arcs and are defined within a
rectangular boundary.
In addition, you have the option to create a point at the center of the rectangular shape, fillets at sharp
corners on the rectangular shape, and/or a surface within the boundary of the rectangular shape.

29
To access the Rectangular Shape menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Rectangle. Click on the menu and
topics below for more information.

Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with one defined placement point

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Rectangle.

2. Choose Options.

3. Select a rectangular shape from the list.

4. Set the remaining parameters, then choose OK.

5. Choose 1 point.

6. Set parameters on the Rectangle One Point dialog box, then choose OK.

Note: Be sure to select the square that represents the placement point to use on the rectangular shape.

7. Enter a point to position the rectangular shape in the graphics window.

8. If prompted, enter the angle increment.

Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. A
smaller value results in a smoother shape.

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window.

10. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating rectangular-shaped geometry with two defined placement points

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Rectangle.

2. Choose Options.

3. Select a rectangular shape from the list.

4. Set the remaining parameters, then choose OK.

5. Choose 2 points.

6. Enter two points for opposing corners of the rectangular shape.

7. If prompted, enter the angle increment.

Note: The angle increment is used to calculate the number of lines contained in the ellipse shape. A
smaller value results in a smoother shape.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to create the shape in additional positions in the graphics window.

30
9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: For information on creating an ellipse that is composed of a single NURBS spline, see Creating an
ellipse.

Setting default rectangular shape options

The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you set defaults for rectangle creation
options. For more information, see Rectangle Options dialog box.

8. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

9. Choose the CAD Settings tab.

10. Choose Rectangular Shapes. The Rectangle Options dialog box opens.

11. Check the options you want Mastercam to use by default.

12. Choose OK to register your choices. The System Configuration dialog box reopens.

13. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

Notes:

¨ You can change rectangular shape options by choosing Main Menu, Create, Rectangle, Options
from the Main Menu.

¨ You can also access the System Configuration dialog box by pressing [Alt+F8].

Creating a polygon

You can create a polygon as a NURBS spline or as a collection of individual linked lines.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Polygon. The Create Polygon dialog box displays.

2. Set parameters as follows:

¨ Number of sides – Sets the number of sides for the polygon. You must have a minimum of three.

31
¨ Radius – Sets the polygon’s radius, which is the distance from the center of the polygon to the edge
of the polygon. The Measure Corner option determines how Mastercam measures the radius.

¨ Rotation – Sets the angle that Mastercam uses to position one of the sides of the polygon relative
to the current construction plane.

¨ Measure radius to corner – Determines how Mastercam measures the radius of the polygon. When
checked, this measures the radius from the center of the polygon to the corners. When left blank, this
measures the polygon from the center to the midpoint of the sides.

¨ Create NURBS - Sets the type of entity to create for the polygon. When checked, this creates the
polygon as a single NURBS spline broken at the starting point. When left blank, this creates the polygon as
multiple lines, each representing a side of the polygon.

3. Choose OK.

4. Enter a point for the center of the polygon.

5. Repeat step 4 to create additional polygons using the current values.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating multiple lines connected at their endpoints

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Line, Multi.

2. Enter a point for the first endpoint of the first line.

3. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the line.

Note: This point becomes the first endpoint of the next line that you create.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional lines.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating an ellipse

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Ellipse. The Create Ellipse dialog box displays.

2. Set parameters as follows:

¨ X Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s horizontal axis

¨ Y Axis Radius – Sets the radius of the ellipse’s vertical axis

¨ Start Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam begins creating the ellipse

¨ End Angle – Sets the angle that Mastercam finishes creating the ellipse

32
¨ Rotation - Sets the angle used to rotate the long axis of the ellipse about its center point

Note: The Create Ellipse dialog box includes a preview window that shows how the ellipse will look. You
can press [Enter] after changing any of the parameters to see how the changes effect the ellipse.

3. Choose OK.

4. Enter a point for the center of the ellipse.

5. Repeat step 4 to create additional ellipses using the current values.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ Mastercam creates each ellipse as a NURBS spline.

¨ You can create a partial ellipse by entering a start angle greater than 0 degrees and/or an end angle
less than 360 degrees.

¨ For information on creating an ellipse shape using line segments, see Creating rectangular-shaped
geometry.

Chamfering lines

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Chamfer. The Chamfer dialog box displays.

2. Select one of the following chamfer Methods:

¨ 1 Distance – Allows you to set the chamfer to equal distances from the endpoints of the two lines
selected in step 4. When selected, the Parameters area displays only one Distance field.

¨ 2 Distances – Allows you to set two separate distances. When selected, the Parameters area
displays two distances: Distance 1 sets the distance from the endpoint of the first line you select to be
chamfered (step 4). Distance 2 sets the distance from the endpoint of the second line you select to be
chamfered (step 4).

¨ Dist/Angle – Allows you to set one distance and an angle. When selected, the Parameters area
displays two fields: Distance, which allows you to set the distance from the endpoint of the first line you
select in step 4, and Angle, which allows you to set an angle that determines the chamfer of the second line
you select in step 4.

3. Enter the necessary distances and angle values and choose OK.

4. Select two non-parallel lines.

5. Repeat step 4 to create additional chamfers.

33
6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can chamfer arcs using the 1 Distance and 2 Distances methods.

¨ The Trim option is selected by default, which causes Mastercam to trim the selected lines to the
chamfer. Deselect this option if you do not want Mastercam to trim the selected lines.

¨ If you select the Chain selection option, Mastercam prompts you to chain entities when you return
to the graphics window.

Filleting curves

he Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. When you fillet curves, you create an arc of a defined
radius tangent to the curves. By default, Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet, although you have the
option to turn off trimming.
You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Fillet or by choosing Main Menu, Create,
Fillet. Click on the menu and topics below for more information.

34
Radius – Determines the size of the resulting fillets.

Angle -

Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. This option toggles between S, L, and F. Choose S (Smaller) to create
fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees, L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180 degrees, or F
(Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees).

Trim - Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. This option is a Yes/No
toggle. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming.

Chain - Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at
sharp corners along the chains. See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information.
CW /CWW –

Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. This option toggles between
A, P, and N. Choose A to create fillets along all corners, P to create fillets at positive, or counterclockwise
(CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction), or N to create fillets at negative, or clockwise (CW)
corners (relative to the chaining direction).

Notes:

¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves.

¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during
geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). These parts often require different radius values
on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.

35
Filleting two curves

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Fillet. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default
menu values in the prompt area.

2. To change the size of the fillets (optional), choose Radius, then enter a value for radius in the
prompt area.

3. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional), toggle Angle<180 to S, L, or F.

Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees, ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees, and
‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles.

4. To change the trimming mode (optional), toggle Trim to Y or N.

Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’, Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. When
Trim is set to ‘N’, Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves.

5. Select two lines, arcs, or splines.

6. If prompted, select the fillet to keep.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional fillets, or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ The radius you enter in step 2 must be greater than or equal to half the distance between the
entities you select in step 5.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Fillet.

Filleting corners along chains of curves

The Fillet, Chain function lets you create fillets at sharp corners along selected chains of curves. You have
the option to create fillets at all corners or at clockwise or counterclockwise corners, relative to the
chaining direction.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Fillet. Mastercam displays the Fillet menu and shows the default
menu values in the prompt area.

2. To change the size of the fillets (optional), choose Radius, then enter a value for radius in the
prompt area.

3. To change the sweep of the fillets (optional), toggle Angle<180 to S, L, or F.

Note: Choosing ‘S’ creates fillets smaller than 180 degrees, ‘L’ creates fillets larger than 180 degrees, and
‘F’ creates fillets that are full circles.

4. To change the trimming mode (optional), toggle Trim to Y or N.

36
Note: When the Trim option is set to ‘Y’, Mastercam trims the tangent curves to the resulting fillets. When
Trim is set to ‘N’, Mastercam creates the fillets but does not trim the tangent curves.

5. To change which corners result in fillets (optional), toggle CW/CCW to A, P, or N.

Note: Choosing ‘A’ results in all corners being filleted (regardless of the chaining direction), ‘P’ results in
counterclockwise corners (relative to the chaining direction) being filleted, ‘N’ results in clockwise corners
(relative to the chaining direction) being filleted.

6. Choose Chain. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu.

7. Select one or more chains of curves, then choose Done.

8. If the selected chains contain existing fillets, Mastercam displays the prompt (in the menu area)
shown below. Choose Yes to change existing fillets to the current radius or No to maintain the original radii
of existing fillets.

9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 to create additional fillets, or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Fillet.

¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary (step 5) is particularly
useful during geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). These parts often require different
radius values on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.

Spiral/Helix dialog box

The Spiral/Helix dialog box allows you to select between the Spiral function and the Helix function. Prior to
version 9 of Mastercam, these two functions were separate C-Hooks. The Spiral function creates spiral
geometry as a series of parametric splines; the Helix function lets you create a tapered helix as a
parametric spline with the center at X0, Y0.

37
Creating a spiral

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Spiral/Helix. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays.

2. Select the Spiral radio button.

3. Enter the parameters as follows:

¨ Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral.

¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which
Mastercam will recalculate the spiral.

¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution

¨ XY Initial Pitch – Determines the amount that the radius increases in a single revolution.

¨ XY Final Pitch – Sets the pitch value for the final revolution of the spiral.

¨ Z Initial Pitch – Determines the distance in the Z axis between each revolution, which is the
incremental distance (step down) in the Z where the spiral will begin.

¨ Z Final Pitch – Sets the Z depth for the final revolution of the spiral.

4. Choose OK. The system calculates and displays the spiral in the graphics window. The Point Entry
menu displays.

5. Place the spiral using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the
desired location.

The following illustration shows a spiral created with a 1-inch radius, 5-degree angle, 7 revolutions, initial
XY pitch of .2, initial Z pitch of .8, and final pitch values of zero.

38
Creating a helix

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Spiral/Helix. The Spiral/Helix dialog box displays.

2. Select the Helix operation radio button.

3. Enter the parameters as follows:

¨ Starting Angle – Sets the angle at which the helix will begin.

¨ Pitch – Sets the distance from a point on one thread to the corresponding point on the next thread
measured parallel to the axis.

¨ Taper Angle – Specifies the thread taper angle.

¨ Radius – Sets the radius for the first spline in the spiral.

¨ Incremental Angle – Controls the number of points on each spline by specifying the angle at which
Mastercam will recalculate the spiral.

¨ # of revolutions – Sets the number of times the spiral will complete a 360-degree revolution

4. Choose OK. The system calculates and displays the tapered helix in the graphics window, centered
on X0, Y0. The Point Entry menu displays.

5. Place the helix using the Point Entry menu selections or by clicking the mouse button at the desired
location.

Creating splines

The Spline menu gives you options for defining the method used to create the spline as well as parameters
that further define the resulting geometry. You can access the Spline menu by choosing Main Menu,
Create, Spline. Click on the menu and topics below for more information.

39
Creating a spline using manual point entry

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Spline.

1. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu.

2. Choose Manual from the Spline menu.

3. Enter points for the spline to pass through, then press [Esc].

4. If prompted, define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional splines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The resulting spline passes through the points you enter in step 3 in the order in which you enter
them. You can create a closed spline by entering the same point for the first and last points in step 4.

Creating a spline using automatic point entry

This function creates a spline from a string of points that lie in a defined pattern.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Spline.

2. Set the Type and Ends parameters on the Spline menu.

3. Choose Automatic from the Spline menu.

4. Select three points.

Note: The spline passes through the first two points that you select then through all other points that lie
within the pattern until it reaches the third selected point.

5. If prompted, define the end condition of the spline’s endpoints.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional splines.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can create a closed spline by selecting the same point for the first and last points in step 4.

40
¨ Mastercam uses a combination of distance and direction from point to point to place the points in
a sensible order. To avoid distorting the intended shape of the spline, delete or blank extraneous points.

Creating splines from existing curves

This function creates splines based on the geometry of existing curves. You can set a tolerance that
determines how closely each resulting spline matches the selected curves, and you can choose to keep,
blank, or delete the original curves once the splines have been created.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Spline.

2. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu.

3. Choose Curves from the Spline menu.

4. Select one or more chains of curves, then choose Done.

5. Set parameters on the From Curve(s) menu, then choose Do it.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional splines.

Note: Mastercam creates a separate spline for each chain of curves that you select in step 4.

Creating a spline tangent to two curves

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Spline.

2. Set the Type parameter on the Spline menu.

3. Choose Blend from the Spline menu.

4. Select a line, arc, or spline for the first blending curve. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on
the selected entity.

5. Move the base of the arrow to the desired tangent position, then left-click.

Note: To set the point of tangency to an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor
crosshairs over the point, then left-click.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for a second blending curve. Mastercam displays a temporary spline between
the tangent points.

7. Set parameters on the Spline Blending Between 2 Curves menu, then choose Do it.

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to create additional splines.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

41
Specifying spline and surface type defaults

The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface
Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. The options are:

¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes; also the surfaces defined from them.

¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points; also the
surfaces defined from them.

¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted.

¨ Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted.

While these types will be generated by default, you can also select a type at the time you create the spline
or surface. See Surface types for more information on surface types.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

2. Choose the CAD Settings tab.

3. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu.

4. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

Defining the tangency of a spline at its endpoints

To define a spline’s end conditions, you must first create a spline using manual or automatic point entry
with the Ends parameter set to Y. For more information, see Creating a spline using manual point entry
and Creating a spline using automatic point entry.

1. On the Spline End Conditions menu, toggle Endpoint to F to set the end condition for the first
endpoint or L to set the end condition of the last endpoint.

2. Set the end condition of the selected endpoint by taking one of the following actions:

¨ Choose 3 pt arc.

¨ Choose Natural.

¨ Choose Values. In the prompt area, enter the XYZ coordinates for the tangent vector.

42
¨ Choose Angle. In the prompt area, enter the angle of the tangent vector.

¨ Choose To entity. Select a line, arc, or spline.

¨ Choose To end. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the vector, if necessary.

Note: You cannot reverse the vector direction if you set the end condition using 3 pt arc or Natural.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other endpoint, if necessary.


Choose Do it to set the spline.

Creating geometric text

The Create Letters dialog box gives you options for creating alphanumeric characters comprised of lines,
arcs, and NURBS splines. You can access the Create Letters dialog box by choosing Main Menu, Create,
Next menu, Letters. Click on the topics below for more information.

Creating geometric text using TrueTypeÒ fonts

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Letters. The Create Letters dialog box displays.

2. Choose the TrueType® button. The Font dialog displays.

3. Select a font and font style, then choose OK.

Note: It is not necessary to select a font size.

4. In the Letters area, enter the text to create as geometry.

5. Select an alignment for the text:

¨ Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select.

¨ Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select.

¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise
direction.

¨ Bottom of Arc - Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a
counterclockwise direction.

6. Enter the height of the letters and the spacing between each letter.

Note: We recommend that you accept the default spacing, which is calculated based on letter height.

7. If you selected Top of Arc or Bottom of Arc for the alignment, enter the radius of the arc to write
the letters along.

43
8. Choose OK.

9. Enter the start point for the letters.

Notes:

¨ The height of the actual letters may not match the value that you entered for letter height because
the system scales the letters based on all of the information encoded into the TrueType font, including
blank space around the letters. If the letters that you create are not the size that you want, you can scale
them. For more information, see Scaling entities using a single scale factor and Scaling entities using
multiple scale factors.

¨ When creating letter geometry using TrueType fonts, you are limited only by the number of
TrueType fonts that are installed on your personal computer. See your Windows® documentation for more
information about TrueType fonts.

Creating geometric text using drafting parameters

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Letters. The Create Letters dialog box displays.

2. Select a Drafting font from the Font pull-down menu.

3. In the Letters area, enter the text to create as geometry.

4. Enter the Height for the letters in the Parameters area.

5. Choose the Drafting Globals button. The Drafting Globals dialog box displays.

6. Configure the parameters on the Note Text tab to obtain the desired appearance for the selected
text.

Note: The Drafting Globals parameters overwrite the Font and Height settings made in steps 2 and 4,
respectively.

7. Choose OK twice.

8. Enter a starting point for the text. The text appears in the graphics window.

9. Press [Esc] when you are satisfied with the placement of the text.

Creating geometric text using pre-defined letter files

Mastercam contains pre-defined letter files in four fonts: Block, Box, Roman, and Slant. Each file contains a
letter or character comprised of lines, arcs, and splines. You can use these files to create a string of
geometric text.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Letters. The Create Letters dialog box displays.

44
2. From the Font pull-down menu, select one of the Block, Box, Roman, Slant, or Other type fonts you
want to use.

Note: The first four directories contain predefined letter files, each representing a different font. The last
option (Other) lets you select a directory where you can store customized letter files.

3. In the Letters area, enter the letters to create as geometry.

4. Depending on the font you select, the Alignment choices may or may not be active. If active, select
an alignment for the text as follows:

¨ Horizontal – Places the text left-to-right starting at the insertion point you select.

¨ Vertical – Places the text top-to-bottom starting at the insertion point you select.

¨ Top of Arc – Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a clockwise
direction.

¨ Bottom of Arc - Places the letters along an arc starting at 180 degrees and continuing in a
counterclockwise direction.

5. In the Height area, enter the letter height.

6. If the Spacing parameter is active, enter the letter spacing.

7. If you selected "Other" and have created your own fonts, based on the Mastercam predefined font
files, select ASCII File names to indicate that you have ASCII file names for the fonts.

8. Choose OK.

9. If prompted, enter the radius of the arc to write the letters along.

10. Click the mouse, and Mastercam creates the letters in the graphics window.

Note: You can open the geometry file of any Mastercam letter/character and edit the file, if necessary. To
prevent overwriting Mastercam’s pre-defined letter files, save the edited file to a different directory.

Importing pattern entities into the current file

You can import entities contained in an existing file (MC9, MC8, MC7, or GE3) into the current file. This
function is useful if you have a part such as a nut or bolt that you use repeatedly in your work. Rather than
recreate it each time you need it, you can import it into the current file as many times as needed.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Pattern. The Create Pattern dialog box displays.

2. Enter the name of an MC9, MC8, MC7, or GE3 file, or select the Browse button to locate the file.

3. Set additional parameters as follows:

¨ Scale – Sets the scale of the pattern entities.

45
¨ Rotation – Sets the angle to rotate the pattern entities.

¨ Mirror X – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s X axis relative to the construction origin.

¨ Mirror Y – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Y axis relative to the construction origin.

¨ Mirror Z – Mirrors the pattern entities about the Cplane’s Z axis relative to the construction origin.

¨ Use Main Color and Level - Sets the color and level of the pattern entities. Select the check box to
apply the current system color and level to the pattern entities. Leave the check box blank to maintain the
original color and level of the pattern entities.

4. Choose OK.

5. Enter a point for the center of the pattern file.

Note: The pattern entities are created in the current Cplane.

6. Repeat step 5 to create the pattern entities at additional positions.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ It is useful to store files containing pattern entities in a separate directory (e.g., Pattern files) so
that they are easy to find when you use this function.

¨ Each time you import a set of pattern entities into the current file, Mastercam identifies the
entities as a group in the database for future use. Mastercam names the group using the pattern file name
and a number to ensure the uniqueness of the group name. For more information about groups, see
Working with groups.

¨ Toolpaths cannot be imported; Solids and dimensions can be.

¨ Choose Undo Last to remove pattern entities in the order in which they were created in the current
file.

Creating bounding box geometry

The Bounding Box dialog box lets you create points and lines to mark the center and extents of a bounding
box, which is a box-shaped boundary that is calculated around selected entities in the graphics window.
This geometry can be useful for checking the overall dimensions of a part, defining alternate construction
planes and origins, and translating a part to a new position in the graphics window.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Next menu, Bound box. The Bounding Box dialog box displays.

2. Set the Create parameters as follows:

¨ Lines – Creates lines along the edges of the bounding box.

¨ Points – Creates points at the corners of the bounding box.

46
¨ Center point – Creates a point at the center of the bounding box.

3. Set the Expand parameters, if desired, as follows:

¨ X – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the X direction.

¨ Y – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Y direction.

¨ Z – Sets the distance to extend the bounding box beyond the selected entities in the Z direction.

4. Select the All entities box if you want the bounding box to select all entities.

5. Choose OK.

6. If you did not select the All entities option, select the entities that the bounding box will surround
and choose Done.

SURFACES
Creating and modifying surfaces

The Surface menu gives you options for creating and modifying surfaces. A surface is a 2D or 3D shape that
has area, which you create from curves (lines, arcs, splines), from other surfaces, or from pre-defined
shapes. You can access the Surface menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface. Click on the topics
below for more information.
Surface associativity
Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of
entities from which the first entity is generated. To understand the relationship between dependent
entities, think of the original, or generating, entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant, or
generated, entity as the "child," which depends on the parent for its definition. Entity association occurs
between the following entities:

¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves

¨ Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces

¨ Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces

¨ Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie

Surface types

Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric, NURBS, and curve-generated. Each type
describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. For
most Create, Surface options, you can choose from all three surface types. However, for Coons, Swept, and
Blend surfaces, you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. Each surface type is described below.
Parametric

47
The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing
spline information. However, a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction
resulting in a patch. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves. In
addition, parametric surfaces have the following characteristics:

¨ Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions

¨ Not associated with their generating curves

¨ Require a large amount of data storage

NURBS
The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline
information. However, a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting
in a grid. In addition, NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics:

¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces, but with slightly more computing time

¨ Compatible with IGES conversion

¨ Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam)

Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format, surfaces that you bring in from another source using the
File, Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). You
can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic.

¨ Not associated with their generating curves

Curve-generated
When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface, it stores a direct reference back to the
original curves. In addition, curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics:

¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces

¨ Associated with their generating curves

Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than
approximations).

Create functions

Creating a lofted surface

The Loft option creates surfaces using a smooth blending of a minimum of two curves or chains of curves.

48
1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Loft.

2. Select two or more curves or chains of curves, then choose Done.

3. Set parameters on the Lofted Surface menu, then choose Do it to create the surface.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional lofted surfaces.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: When you select curves for a loft surface, it is important that you pay attention to where you select
each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curves one and two, curves
two and three, etc.) compose one edge of the surface. When you select a curve or chain of curves, the
system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. In order to
better match your curves or chains of curves, you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining
method , which lets you match curves manually or by entity, branch, node, or point.

49
Creating a Coons surface

This option lets you create a surface from a grid of curves. In order to create Coons surfaces, you must use
Coons chaining, a type of chaining selection used only for this function. There are two types of Coons
chaining: automatic and manual. Click on the topics below for more information.

Creating a Coons surface using manual Coons chaining

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Coons.

2. Choose No (not to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box.

Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the
Mastercam session if you check Don’
t ask again. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box, choose Screen, Config. Select the
CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time.

3. In the prompt area, enter the number of patches to use in the ‘along’ direction.

4. Enter the number of patches to use in the ‘across’ direction.

5. Follow the system prompts to select the ‘along’ and ‘across’ chains, then choose Done to complete
chaining.

6. Set parameters on the Coons menu, as needed.

Note: For help on the menu options, press [Alt+H].

7. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function.

50
Creating a Coons surface using automatic Coons chaining

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Coons.

2. Choose Yes (to use automatic Coons chaining) on the Automatic Coons Chaining dialog box.

Note: Mastercam eliminates this step for Coons surfaces that you create during the remainder of the
Mastercam session if you check Don’
t ask again. If at any time you want to regain access to this dialog box, choose Screen, Config. Select the
CAD Settings tab and choose Ask each time.

3. Select two curves that intersect at the upper-left corner of the geometry.

4. Select the end of a curve at the lower-right corner of the geometry.

5. Set parameters on the Coons menu, as needed.

Note: For help on the menu options, press [Alt+H].

6. Choose Do it to create the Coons surface.

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to create additional Coons surfaces or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Enabling Coons Auto Chaining

Coons Auto Chaining lets you define a Coons surface by selecting three entities: two curves that meet in
the upper left corner and one curve in the lower right corner of the geometry. You can enable Coons Auto
Chaining so that it is always used, or make Mastercam ask the operator to approve its use each time. You
can also disable Coons Auto Chaining, which forces the operator to use manual chaining.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

2. Choose the CAD Settings tab.

3. Do one of the following:

¨ Check Yes to use Coons Auto Chaining by default.

¨ Check Ask each time to make Mastercam query the operator.

¨ Check No to disable Coons Auto Chaining.

4. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

51
Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

Automatic Coons Chaining

Automatic Coons chaining lets you define a surface patch based on three entities: the two curves that meet
in the upper-left corner and one curve in the lower-right corner of your geometry.

Mastercam uses a minimum branch angle to determine which entities to chain when there are intersecting
entities. The system does not chain any entity that intersects at an angle larger than the minimum branch
angle. The default value for the minimum branch angle is 30 degrees. However, you can enter a different
value by choosing Angle from the menu area before selecting the entities that you want to chain.

Note: If you don’t get the results you want using automatic Coons chaining, try using manual Coons
chaining.

Manual Coons Chaining

In order to understand manual Coons chaining, you must understand patch layout. Coons patch boundaries
are laid out in a grid of along and across curves. Along curves lie in rows that are parallel to the stepping
direction. Across curves lie in columns that are perpendicular to the stepping direction. You define the
along curves for the entire surface first, followed by the across curves. The following graphic shows the
selection of two across curves and two along curves to form a square, or patch.

52
The following graphic shows how multiple patches form a 3-by-3 grid that defines the Coons surface.

The following example shows graphics of the same curves and Coons surface used in the Automatic Coons
Chaining example that required three selection steps. Following these graphics you see a top view of the
curves and the seven selection steps required to create the surface using manual Coons chaining.
Note: Where you select each curve affects your results. Be consistent when selecting the start of each
across and along curve.

53
Note: This example shows a 1-by-2 grid.

Coons surface blending methods

The following graphics show a sample surface (shown below in isometric view) created using each of the
Coons blending methods (shown in side view).

54
Creating a ruled surface

The Ruled option creates surfaces using a linear blending a minimum of two curves or chains of curves.

55
1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Ruled.

2. Select two or more curves or chains of curves, then choose Done. The Ruled surface parameters
menu displays.

3. Take one or more of the following actions:

¨ Toggle Type to P (parametric), N (NURBS), or C (curve-generated).

¨ Choose Tolerance, type a value in the displayed text box, then press [Enter].

4. Choose Do it to create the surface.

Notes:

¨ The Create, Rectangle function creates a ruled surface based on the extents of a rectangle or
rectangular shape, such as an obround.

¨ When you select curves for a ruled surface, it is important that you pay attention to where you
select each curve or chain of curves because the selected ends of each pair of curves (curve one and two,
two and three, etc.) compose one edge of the surface. When you select a curve or chain of curves, the
system places a temporary arrow at the closest endpoint to show which end you have selected. In order to
better match your curves or chains of curves, you may want to select your curves using the Sync chaining
method , which lets you match curves manually or by entity, branch, node, or point.

56
Creating a revolved surface

This option creates a surface that is circular in one direction. The system revolves one or more selected
chains of curves (profile entities) about a single line (axis of rotation). When you select the axis, the system
displays a temporary arrow at one end of the axis to indicate the rotation direction. The following graphics
identify a profile entity and axis of rotation and show them used in a full and partial rotation.

1. From the Main Menu, choose Create, Surface, Revolved. The Chaining Methods menu displays.

2. Select one or more chain of curves, then choose Done.

3. Select a line for the axis of rotation. The displays.

4. Set parameters on the Revolved Surface menu, as needed, then choose Do it to create the revolved
surfaces.

57
Editing the sweep of a revolved surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a curve-generated revolved surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions:

¨ Enter an angle value for Sweep. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle.

¨ Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle.

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces, see Surface types.

Creating a swept surface

The Sweep function creates a surface by sweeping chains of curves along a path. The chains that you select
to sweep are called ‘across’ chains. These chains define cross-sections of the resulting surface. The chains
that define the path or trajectory of the sweep are called ‘
along’ chains.
You can define a swept surface using the following combinations of across (section) and along (path)
chains:

¨ 1 across/1 along: Mastercam sweeps one section chain along one path chain. You have the option
to translate or rotate the cross-section chain along the path. For more information, see Translate/Rotate
Example.

¨ 2 or more across/1 along: Mastercam transitions from one section chain to the next in the order in
which you defined them while following one path chain. This is known as a linear blend.

¨ 1 across/2 along: Mastercam proportionally scales one section chain between two path chains.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Sweep.

2. Select one or more ‘across’ chains of curves to define the cross-sections of the surface, then
choose Done.

3. Select one or two ‘along’ chains of curves for the sweep path, then choose Done.

Note: If you selected more than one chain in step 2, you can select only one path chain. In this case, you do
not have to choose Done
; Mastercam moves to the next step automatically.

58
4. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the current surface error tolerance, surface type, and
translate/rotate settings. If necessary, use the Swept Surface menu to edit these settings by taking the
following actions:

¨ To edit the surface error tolerance, choose Tolerance. In the prompt area, type a tolerance value,
then press [Enter].

Note: The surface tolerance determines how closely the resulting surface fits the along and across curves.

¨ To edit the surface type, choose Type to toggle it to N (NURBS) or P (parametric). For more
information, see Surface types.

¨ Toggle Trans/Rot to T to translate the section chain along the path chain or R to rotate the section
chain as it is translated along the path chain.

Note: This option is available only when one across chain and one along chain are selected. For more
information, see Translate/Rotate Example.

5. Choose Do it to create the Swept surface.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional swept surfaces, or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The following graphics show three swept surfaces created using various combinations of across and
along chains.
1 across/1 along

59
2 across/1 along

Creating draft surfaces using a defined length

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Draft. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu.

2. Select one or more chains of curves (lines, arcs, splines), then choose Done. Mastercam displays
the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area.

Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves.

3. Toggle To plane to N.

4. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. To change this length, choose Length, then
enter a value for length in the prompt area.

60
5. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction, which is calculated
perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). To change the
draft direction, choose View. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view.

Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane).

6. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. To change this value, choose Angle, then enter
a value between ±180° in the prompt area.

Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion.

7. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Choose P for parametric, N for NURBS, or C for curve-
generated. For more information, see Surface types.

8. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s).

9. To create draft surfaces on additional curves, choose Curves, then repeat steps 2 through 8, or to
exit the function, press [Esc]

About draft surfaces

A draft surface is created by extruding, or driving out, the shape of a curve (line, arc, or spline) in a linear
direction perpendicular to some view, often with an angle, or degree of tilt. The draft surface extends to a
defined length or plane.
For information on creating draft surfaces, click on the following topics:
Creating draft surfaces using a defined length

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Draft. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu.

2. Select one or more chains of curves (lines, arcs, splines), then choose Done. Mastercam displays
the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area.

Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves.

3. Toggle To plane to N.

4. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. To change this length, choose Length, then
enter a value for length in the prompt area.

5. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction, which is calculated
perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). To change the
draft direction, choose View. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view.

Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane).

6. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. To change this value, choose Angle, then enter
a value between ±180° in the prompt area.

Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion.

61
7. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Choose P for parametric, N for NURBS, or C for curve-
generated. For more information, see Surface types.

8. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s).

9. To create draft surfaces on additional curves, choose Curves, then repeat steps 2 through 8, or to
exit the function, press [Esc].

Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Draft. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu.

2. Select one or more chains of curves (lines, arcs, splines), then choose Done. Mastercam displays
the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area.

Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves.

3. Toggle To plane to Y.

4. Choose Plane. Use the Define Plane menu to define where the draft surface(s) terminate.

Note: Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces in cases where the plane is defined at an angle other than
perpendicular with respect to the draft direction.

5. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction, which is calculated
perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). To change the
draft direction, choose View. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view.

Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane).

6. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. To change this value, choose Angle, then enter
a value between ±180° in the prompt area.

Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion.

7. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Toggle the Type option to P for parametric, N for NURBS,
or C for curve-generated.

Note: For additional information regarding surface types, see Surface types.

8. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s).

9. To create draft surfaces on additional curves, choose Curves, then repeat steps 2 through 8, or to
exit the function, press [Esc].

62
The pictures below show an example of a draft surface:

Draft Surface menu options

The Draft Surface menu options define the following characteristics of the draft surfaces that you’re
creating: draft direction, draft angle, surface type, and position where the surface ends. Click on the menu
below for more information.

63
Editing the angle of a draft surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a curve-generated draft surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter an Angle value, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces, see Surface types.

Editing the length of a draft surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a curve-generated draft surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter a 3D Length value, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: For more information about curve-generated surfaces, see Surface types.

Creating draft surfaces using a defined plane

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Draft. Mastercam displays the Chaining Methods menu.

2. Select one or more chains of curves (lines, arcs, splines), then choose Done. Mastercam displays
the Draft Surface menu and lists the current menu settings in the prompt area.

64
Note: Mastercam creates a separate draft surface for each individual entity in each chain of curves.

3. Toggle To plane to N.

4. The default surface length is listed in the prompt area. To change this length, choose Length, then
enter a value for length in the prompt area.

5. A direction arrow on the first selected chain reflects the current draft direction, which is calculated
perpendicular to a selected view (You may need to rotate the geometry to see the arrow). To change the
draft direction, choose View. Mastercam displays a menu where you can select a new view.

Note: The default view is the current construction plane (Cplane).

6. The default draft angle is listed in the prompt area. To change this value, choose Angle, then enter
a value between ±180° in the prompt area.

Note: A zero value produces no tilt and is the equivalent of a perpendicular extrusion.

7. Set the type of draft surface(s) to create. Choose P for parametric, N for NURBS, or C for curve-
generated. For more information, see Surface types.

8. Choose Do it to create the draft surface(s).

9. To create draft surfaces on additional curves, choose Curves, then repeat steps 2 through 8, or to
exit the function, press [Esc].

Creating surfaces in pre-defined (primitive) shapes

A primitive surface model is composed of one or more NURBS surfaces in a pre-defined shape, such as a
block or sphere. These models are fully closed and appear to be solid when shading is turned on. With the
exception of extruded surface models, primitive surfaces are not based on curve geometry.
The Primitive Surfaces menu gives you options for creating different types of primitive surface models. You
can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive. Click on the topics
below for more information.

Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive surface model

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive, Cylinder. Mastercam creates a cylinder-
shaped surface model in the graphics window.

2. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows:

¨ To set the cylinder’s size, choose Height and Radius. After choosing either option, you must enter a
value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the cylinder’s orientation, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. For help
on this menu, press [Alt+H].

65
¨ To set the cylinder’s position, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the cylinder’s bottom face.

¨ To set the cylinder’s sweep, choose Sweep angle. In the prompt area, enter a value for sweep
angle.

Note: You can create a partial cylinder by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. The Start angle
parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cylinder.

¨ To set the cylinder’s attributes, choose Attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and
level of the surface model.

Note: By default, the cylinder will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu)
unless you use this option to set different attributes.

3. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cylinder.

Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type, Mastercam creates each new surface
model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. They are
exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating a cone-shaped primitive surface model

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive, Cone. Mastercam creates a cone-
shaped surface model in the graphics window.

2. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows:

¨ To set the cone’s size, choose Height, Btm radius, Top radius, and Taper angle. After choosing any
of these options, you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the cone’s orientation, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. For help on
this menu, press [Alt+H].

¨ To set the cone’s position, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center
of the cone’s bottom face.

¨ To set the cone’s sweep, choose Sweep angle. In the prompt area, enter a value for sweep angle.

Note: You can create a partial cone by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. The Start angle parameter
determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the cone.

¨ To set the cone’s attributes, choose Attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level
of the surface model.

Note: By default, the cone will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless
you use this option to set different attributes.

3. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the cone.

66
Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type, Mastercam creates each new surface
model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. They are
exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them

Creating a block-shaped primitive surface model

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive, Block. Mastercam creates a block-
shaped surface model in the graphics window.

2. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows:

¨ To set the block’s size, choose Height, Length, Width, and Taper angle. After choosing any of these
option, you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the block’s position, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center
of the block’s bottom face.

¨ To set the block’s orientation, choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). Use the Axis Selection menu to set the
axes that correspond to the block
’s height and length. For help on this menu, press [Alt+H]. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block
about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area.

¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step, choose Corners. Enter two points in the graphics
window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. Mastercam updates length, width, and base point.
The block’s height is unchanged.

¨ To set the block’s attributes, choose Attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level
of the surface model.

Note: By default, the block will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu) unless
you use this option to set different attributes.

3. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the block.

Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type, Mastercam creates each new surface
model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. They are
exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating a torus-shaped primitive surface model

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive, Torus. Mastercam creates a torus
(doughnut)-shaped surface model in the graphics window.

2. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows:

¨ To set the size of the torus, choose Maj radius and Min radius. After choosing either of these
options, you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the orientation of the torus, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. For
help on this menu, press [Alt+H].

67
¨ To set the position of the torus, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the torus’ hole.

¨ To set the sweep of the torus, choose Sweep angle. In the prompt area, enter a value for sweep
angle.

Note: You can create a partial torus by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. The Start angle
parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the torus.

¨ To set the attributes of the torus, choose Attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and
level of the surface model.

Note: By default, the of the torus will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu)
unless you use this option to set different attributes.

3. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the torus.

Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type, Mastercam creates each new surface
model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. They are
exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating a sphere-shaped primitive surface model

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive, Sphere. Mastercam creates a sphere-
shaped surface model in the graphics window.

2. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows:

¨ To set the sphere’s size, choose Radius, then enter a value for radius in the prompt area.

¨ To set the sphere’s orientation, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. For help
on this menu, press [Alt+H].

¨ To set the sphere’s position, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the center
of the sphere.

¨ To set the sphere’s sweep, choose Sweep angle. In the prompt area, enter a value for sweep angle.

Note: You can create a partial sphere by entering a value of less than 360 degrees. The Start angle
parameter determines the angle at which Mastercam begins creating the sphere.

¨ To set the sphere’s attributes, choose Attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and level
of the surface model.

Note: By default, the sphere will be creating using the main system color and level (Secondary menu)
unless you use this option to set different attributes.

3. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the sphere.

68
Note: If you create multiple primitive surface models of a given type, Mastercam creates each new surface
model using the exact parameters as the previously created surface model of the same type. They are
exact duplicates unless you modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating an extruded primitive surface model

Mastercam creates an extruded primitive surface model by driving out the shape of a selected chain of
curves in a perpendicular direction.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Primitive, Extrusion

2. Select one chain of curves.

Note: If you select a spline, it must be closed.

3. If prompted, choose Yes to close the chain of curves. Mastercam closes the chain by drawing a
straight line between the two open endpoints. Mastercam drives the shape of the curves in a
perpendicular direction to create the surface model.

Note: Choosing No cancels the selection and exits the function.

4. Modify the surface model by setting parameters on the Extrusion menu as follows:

¨ To set the extrusion’s size, choose Height, Scale, Offset, and Taper angle. After choosing any of
these options, you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the extrusion’s orientation, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis. For help
on this menu, press [Alt+H]. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the extrusion about its base point by an
angle value that you enter in the prompt area.

¨ To set the extrusion’s position, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the extrusion’s bottom face.

¨ To set the extrusion’s attributes, choose Attributes. Use the Attributes menu to set the color and
level of the surface model.

Note: By default, the extrusion will be created using the main system color and level (Secondary menu)
unless you use this option to set different attributes.

5. Press [Esc] to finalize the creation of the extruded surface model.

Note: This functionality is similar to the Primitives function offered with the Mastercam Solids product,
which creates actual solid bodies. For more information, see Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive)
shapes.

Extracting surfaces from solids

You can use solids to extract surface information. Mastercam creates a separate NURBS surface for each
solid face in your selection.

69
1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, From solid.

2. Select one or more faces and/or whole solid bodies, then choose Done to extract the surfaces. The
solids are unchanged.

Modify functions
Creating fillet surfaces

The Fillet menu gives you options for constructing fillet surfaces. A fillet surface is mathematically
equivalent to a series of arcs and is tangent to one or two surfaces, based on how it is constructed. You can
access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Fillet.

Creating a fillet surface between a plane and a surface


This option creates one or more fillet surfaces, each of which is tangent to a plane and a surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Fillet, Plane/surf.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. In the prompt area, enter a value for the radius of the fillet surfaces. The Define Plane menu
displays.

Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if
you vary the radius along the surface in the following step.

4. Define the tangent plane.

5. Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the plane’s normal arrow, if necessary, then choose OK to
set the direction.

Note: The arrow points to the side of the plane that you want the fillet surfaces to be tangent to.

6. Set parameters on the Plane/Surface menu, as needed, then choose Do it to create the fillet
surfaces.

Note: For help on the Plane/Surface menu options, press [Alt+H].

Creating a fillet surface between a curve and a surface

This option creates one or more fillet surfaces, each of which has a defined radius, lies on a curve or chain
of curves at a rail location, and is tangent to one or more selected surfaces.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Fillet, Curve/surf.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. In the prompt area, enter a value for radius.

70
4. Select one or more chains of curves, then choose Done.

5. Indicate which side of the curves to use to create the fillet surfaces by choosing Left or Right with
relation to the direction of the curve.

6. Set parameters on the Curve/Surface Fillet Surface menu, then choose Do it to create the fillet
surfaces.

Note: For help on the Curve/Surface menu options, press [Alt+H].

Creating a fillet surface between two surfaces

This option creates one or more fillet surfaces, each of which is tangent to two surfaces. When you choose
this option, the system prompts you to select two sets of surfaces. The system attempts to create fillet
surfaces by pairing each surface in the first set with each surface in the second set. You can select one set,
but it must contain at least two surfaces. With one set, the system attempts to create fillet surfaces by
pairing each surface in the set with every other surface in the set.

In some cases, having only one set of surfaces could prove more time consuming. For example, if you have
multiple surface walls and a single surface floor all in a single set, the system looks for intersections
between all walls and the floor. If, however, you select the walls as one set of surfaces and the floor as the
second set of surfaces, the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the floor.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Fillet, Surf/surf.

2. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces, then choose Done.

3. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces, then choose Done.

4. In the prompt area, enter a value for radius.

Note: The radius that you enter should be an average representation of the variable radii that you enter if
you vary the radius along the surface in the following step.

5. Set parameters on the Surface/Surface Fillet Surface menu, then choose Do it to create the fillet
surfaces.

Note: For help on the Surface/Surface menu options, press [Alt+H].

6. If prompted, select the surfaces to delete, then press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: You receive this prompt only if you selected the Fillet Both Sides check box on the Surface-Surface
Fillet dialog box and the system finds more than one solution.

Offsetting surfaces
This function offsets one or more surfaces by a distance and a direction relative to the surface normal
direction of each selected surface. When Mastercam offsets a surface, it creates the offset surface as a
separate surface from the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Offset.

71
2. Select one or more surfaces to offset, then choose Done. Mastercam displays the Offset menu. The
default offset values display in the prompt area.

3. To change the offset distance, choose Offset dist. In the prompt area, enter a new value for the
distance to offset the surfaces.

Note: You can enter a positive or negative value. A positive value offsets the surfaces in the positive
surface normal direction. A negative value offsets the surfaces in the negative surface normal direction.

4. To check the surface normal directions, choose Check norms. Mastercam displays the Check
Surface Normals menu. You can check the normal direction of one or all surfaces in the selection. For more
information, press [Alt+H] from the menu.

5. Indicate what to do with the original surfaces once the offset surfaces have been created. Toggle
Dispose to K to keep the surfaces, B to blank the surfaces, or D to delete the surfaces.

6. Choose Do it to create the offset surfaces.

Trimming surfaces
The Trim or Extend Surface menu gives you options for trimming, untrimming, and extending surfaces. You
can access the Trim or Extend menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface or by choosing Main
Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend. Click on the topics below for more information.

Trimming surfaces to curves

This function trims surfaces to curves (lines, arcs, and splines or surface curves) If the trimming curves do
not lie directly on the surfaces, Mastercam projects them onto the surfaces in order to calculate the
intersection where the surface will be trimmed. When Mastercam trims a surface, it creates the trimmed
surface as a new surface, and you can keep, blank, or delete the original (base) surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, To curves.

2. Select one or more surfaces to trim, then choose Done.

3. Select a curve or chains of curves to use to trim the surfaces, then choose Done.

Note: You must select lines, arcs, and/or splines as the trimming curves in this step. However, you can
replace these trimming curves with surface curves in step 5, if necessary.

4. Choose Options. Set the step method and trimming parameters, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
trimmed surfaces than Fixed step.

5. Set the remaining parameters on the Trim to Curves menu, then choose Do it.

Note: To trim the surfaces to surface curves instead of using the trimming curves selected in step 3,
choose Surf crvs, then select one or more surface curves in the graphics window.

72
6. Select a highlighted surface. Mastercam displays an arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming, then click.

Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface, which may produce unintended results.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ This function is similar to the Create, Curve, Project function, which gives you the option to trim
surfaces to projected curves. However, in this function no curves are created.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, To curves.

¨ The following graphics show a surface trimmed by a circle.

Trimming surfaces to a plane


This function trims surfaces to a plane. When Mastercam trims a surface, it creates the trimmed surface as
a new surface, and you can keep, blank, or delete the original (base) surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, To plane.

2. Select one or more surfaces to trim, then choose Done.

3. Define the trimming plane. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics
window.

4. The arrow on the graphic indicates the side that Mastercam will keep after trimming. Take one of
the following actions:

¨ Choose OK to keep the side that the arrow currently points to.

¨ Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the arrow, then choose OK.

73
5. Choose Options. Set the step method and trimming parameters, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
trimmed surfaces than Fixed step.

6. Choose Do it to trim the surfaces.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ This function is similar to the Create, Curve, Slice function, which gives you the option to trim
surfaces to a plane. However, in this function no curves are created.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, To plane.

¨ The following graphics show a rectangular surface trimmed to a plane.

Trimming surfaces to surfaces


This function looks for intersections between two sets of surfaces, one of which must contain only one
surface, and trims one or both of the sets of surfaces. When Mastercam trims a surface, it creates the
trimmed surface as a new surface, and you can keep, blank, or delete the original (base) surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, To surfaces.

2. Select one or more surfaces for the first set of surfaces, then choose Done.

74
3. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of surfaces, then choose Done.

Note: If you selected more than one surface in step 2, you must select only one surface in this step.

4. Choose Options. Set the step method and trimming parameters, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
trimmed surfaces than Fixed step.

5. Choose Do it, then take one of the following actions:

¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the first set of surfaces, select a surface from the first set. Move
the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming, then click.

¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim only the second set of surfaces, select a surface from the second set.
Move the base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming, then click.

¨ If in step 4 you chose to trim both sets of surfaces, select a surface from the first set. Move the
base of the arrow to the area of the surface to keep after trimming, then click. Repeat for a surface from
the second set.

Note: Avoid selecting the outer boundary of the surface, which may produce unintended results.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ Mastercam trims the surfaces based on the section of the selected surface(s) that you keep in step
5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the function on it
separately from the other surfaces.

¨ This function is similar to the Create, Curve, Intersect function, which gives you the option to trim
two sets of surfaces to their intersections. However, in this function no curves are created.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, To
surfaces.

¨ The following graphics show one surface trimmed to its intersection with another surface.

75
Creating a trimmed surface within a flat boundary
This function creates a trimmed NURBS surface within a flat boundary defined by chain(s) of curves or
surface edges. When Mastercam trims a surface to the boundary, it creates and blanks an untrimmed base
(parent) surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, Flat bndy.

2. Choose Options. Set the step method, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
trimmed surfaces than Fixed step.

3. Use the chaining methods on the Flat Boundary menu to select one or more planar chains of
curves.

Notes:

¨ If selecting multiple chains, there must be one outermost chain, which defines the outer boundary
of the surface. Additional chains must be nested within this boundary. Nested chains form holes in the flat
boundary surface.

¨ You can use the Manual chaining method to select surface edges and surface curves. For
information on manual chaining, see Manual chaining.

4. If you selected any open chains in step 3, Mastercam displays the message shown below. Choose
Yes to close the chains or No to remove the open chains from calculation of the trimmed surface.

Note: If you choose Yes, Mastercam calculates (but does not create) a curve between the two open
endpoints for the purpose of defining the closed boundary.

5. Choose Done to return to the Flat Boundary menu.

6. Choose Do it to create the flat boundary surface.

Notes:

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Flat bndy.

76
¨ The following graphics show the resulting surface when all three chains are selected. The flat
boundary surface has two holes from the nested chains.

Splitting a surface into two trimmed surfaces

This function breaks a surface at a fixed position along one of the surface directions. When the system
breaks the selected surface, it creates two trimmed surfaces and blanks the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, Split.

2. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view.

3. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the split to pass through on the surface (the
fixed position), then click.

Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor
crosshairs over the point, then click.

4. Choose OK to split the surface along the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the surface) or
choose Flip to reverse the direction before choosing OK.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to split additional surfaces.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Split.

Untrimming a surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, Untrim.

2. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To untrim a surface by deleting it and unblanking its untrimmed base surface, set Dispose to D.

77
¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and keep the trimmed surface visible in the
graphics window, set Dispose to K.

¨ To return a base surface to the graphics window and blank the trimmed surface, set Dispose to B.

3. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Mastercam returns its base surface to the
graphics window and disposes of the trimmed surface according to the selection made in step 2.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to untrim additional surfaces.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Untrim.

Removing a trimmed boundary from a surface

The Remove Boundary function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. You can fill internal holes (those
that lie completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the
outer boundary of the surface). For each hole that you select to fill, Mastercam closes the hole by removing
the trimmed boundary. If the trimmed surface contains only one hole, Mastercam closes it by removing the
trimmed surface and replacing it with the untrimmed base surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, Remove bndy.

2. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the
surface.

Note: To see the arrow, you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview, Isometric).

3. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill, then left-click.

4. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries,
Mastercam displays the following prompt:

Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes, or No to fill only the selected hole.
Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary, Mastercam closes the hole by removing the
boundary. You do not receive this prompt.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to remove trimmed boundaries from additional surfaces, or press [Esc] to
exit the function.

78
Notes:

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Remove
bndy.

¨ This function differs from the Fill Holes function in which Mastercam creates trimmed surfaces to
fill the holes; no trimmed boundaries are removed. For more information, see the related topics below.

¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer
boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or
is blanked), the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed
boundaries, as shown in the following example.

This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface
always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface.

¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer
boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or
is blanked), the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed
boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary, as shown
in the following example.

79
Filling a trimmed boundary in a surface

The Fill Holes function lets you fill holes in a trimmed surface. You can fill internal holes (those that lie
completely within the outer boundary of the surface) and external holes (those that lie along the trimmed
outer boundary of the surface). For each hole that you select to fill, Mastercam creates a trimmed surface
within the boundary defined by the hole.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Surface, Fill holes.

2. Select a trimmed surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the
surface.

Note: To see the arrow, you may need to switch to isometric view (Gview, Isometric).

3. Slide the base of the arrow to a trimmed boundary that you want to fill, then left-click.

4. If you selected an internal boundary (hole) and the surface contains multiple internal boundaries,
Mastercam displays the following prompt:

Choose Yes to fill all of the internal holes, or No to fill only the selected hole.
Note: If you selected an external trimmed boundary, Mastercam closes the hole by creating a trimmed
surface within it. You do not receive this prompt.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to fill holes in additional surfaces, or press [Esc] to exit the function.

80
Notes:

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Fill holes.

¨ This function differs from the Remove Boundary function in which Mastercam removes the
trimmed boundaries but nothing new is created. For more information, see the related topics below.

¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does not touch the outer
boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or
is blanked), the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed
boundaries, as shown in the following example.

This condition is true for all flat boundary surfaces because the base surface of a flat boundary surface
always extends beyond the outer boundary of the flat boundary surface.

¨ If you select the outer boundary of a trimmed surface and that boundary does touch the outer
boundary of the untrimmed base surface (regardless of whether the base surface is currently displayed or
is blanked), the hole that gets filled is defined as the space between the trimmed and the untrimmed
boundaries but only along the selected trimmed edge until it reaches the untrimmed boundary, as shown
in the following example.

81
Extending a surface by a defined length

This function extends a surface by a defined length. You can extend the surface linearly or following the
curvature of the surface. When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates the extended surface as a new
surface, and you can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Surface.

2. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the
curvature of the surface.

3. Set To plane to N.

Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N.

4. Choose Length. In the prompt area, enter the length to extend the surface.

5. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu, as needed.

6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend, then click.

8. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length.

9. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces.

10. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Extend.

¨ When possible, Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric,
NURBS, or curve-generated) as the original surface. However, the system cannot extend all surfaces
precisely. For example, you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve-
generated. In such cases, Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Choosing Yes tells the system to
create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

82
Extending a surface to a plane

This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates
the extended surface as a new surface, and you can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Surface.

2. Set Linear to Y.

3. Set To plane to Y.

4. Choose Plane. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to.

5. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu, as needed.

6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend, then click.

8. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Extend.

¨ When possible, Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric,
NURBS, or curve-generated) as the original surface. However, the system cannot extend all surfaces
precisely. For example, you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve-
generated. In such cases, Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Choosing Yes tells the system to
create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

Extending a surface by a defined length

This function extends a surface by a defined length. You can extend the surface linearly or following the
curvature of the surface. When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates the extended surface as a new
surface, and you can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original surface.

83
1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Surface.

2. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the
curvature of the surface.

3. Set To plane to N.

Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N.

4. Choose Length. In the prompt area, enter the length to extend the surface.

5. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu, as needed.

6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend, then click.

8. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length.

9. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces.

10. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Extend.

¨ When possible, Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric,
NURBS, or curve-generated) as the original surface. However, the system cannot extend all surfaces
precisely. For example, you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve-
generated. In such cases, Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Choosing Yes tells the system to
create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

Extending a surface to a plane

This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates
the extended surface as a new surface, and you can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Surface.

2. Set Linear to Y.

3. Set To plane to Y.

4. Choose Plane. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to.

84
5. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu, as needed.

6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend, then click.

8. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Extend.

¨ When possible, Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric,
NURBS, or curve-generated) as the original surface. However, the system cannot extend all surfaces
precisely. For example, you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve-
generated. In such cases, Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Choosing Yes tells the system to
create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

Blending two surfaces

Mastercam blends two surfaces by creating a third surface that is tangent to the first two surfaces. This
function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, 2 surf blnd.

2. Select a surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

3. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location
where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface, then click to set the blend location.

Note: To select a blend location at an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping. Move the base of the
arrow over the desired point, then left-click.

4. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction, if necessary, then choose OK to set the direction.
Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface.

Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface, see Blend direction
example.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for a second surface. Mastercam creates a temporary surface between
the two blending splines and displays the 2 Surface Blending menu.

6. Set parameters on the 2 Surface Blending menu, as needed, then choose Do it to create the blend
surface.

Note: To receive help on the menu options, press [Alt+H].

85
Blending three surfaces

Mastercam blends three surfaces by creating a fourth surface that is tangent to the first three surfaces.
This function is useful for eliminating unwanted features in order to smooth out part of a surface model.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, 3 surf blnd.

2. Select a surface. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

3. Define the location and width of the tangent surface: Move the base of the arrow to the location
where you want to blend the new surface to the existing surface, then click to set the blend location.

Note: To select a blend location at an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping. Move the base of the
arrow over the desired point, then left-click.

4. Choose Flip to reverse the blend direction, if necessary, then choose OK to set the direction.
Mastercam creates a temporary blending spline on the surface.

Note: For an example of how the blend direction affects the resulting surface, see Blend direction
example.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for two additional surfaces. Mastercam creates a temporary surface
between the three blending splines and displays the 3 Surface Blending menu.

6. Set parameters on the 3 Surface Blending menu, as needed, then choose Do it to create the blend
surface.

Note: To receive help on the menu options, press [Alt+H].

Blending three intersecting fillet surfaces

Mastercam blends three intersecting fillet surfaces by creating one or more surfaces that are tangent to
the first three surfaces. This function is useful for rounding the corners of a filleted "box." It is similar to
blending three surfaces. However, with this option Mastercam automatically calculates the location where
the blend surface(s) are tangent to the fillet surfaces.
Note: The selected geometry determines the number of surfaces that the system creates, as well as
whether the resulting surfaces are trimmed or untrimmed.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Surface, Next menu, Fillet blnd.

2. Set parameters on the 3 Fillet Blend menu, as needed, then select three fillet surfaces. If the Sides
parameter is set to 3, Mastercam creates a three-sided blend surface. Otherwise, take one of the following
actions:

¨ Manually adjust one or more of the boundaries. For more information, see Adjusting the
boundaries of a fillet blend surface.

¨ Toggle Trim, Dispose, and Edge spl to new settings, as needed.

86
¨ Choose Select to toggle Sides to a new setting and/or reselect the three fillet surfaces that you
want to blend.

3. Choose Do it to create the six-sided fillet blend surface.

Surface associativity

Entity association refers to the dependent relationship between one entity and a second entity or group of
entities from which the first entity is generated. To understand the relationship between dependent
entities, think of the original, or generating, entity or entities as the "parent" and the resultant, or
generated, entity as the "child," which depends on the parent for its definition. Entity association occurs
between the following entities:

¨ Between curve-generated surfaces and their reference curves

¨ Between offset surfaces and their generating surfaces

¨ Between trimmed surfaces and their generating (base) surfaces

¨ Between surface curves and the surfaces on which they lie

Surface types

Mastercam lets you create three types of surfaces: parametric, NURBS, and curve-generated. Each type
describes a method that the system uses to calculate and store mathematical data about the surface. For
most Create, Surface options, you can choose from all three surface types. However, for Coons, Swept, and
Blend surfaces, you can choose only Parametric and NURBS. Each surface type is described below.

Parametric

The parametric method of storing surface information is analogous to the parametric method of storing
spline information. However, a parametric surface expands each curve segment in a second direction
resulting in a patch. A patch is an area of the surface bounded by four segments of generating curves. In
addition, parametric surfaces have the following characteristics:

¨ Compatible with IGES and VDA conversions

¨ Not associated with their generating curves

¨ Require a large amount of data storage

NURBS

The NURBS method of storing surface information is analogous to the NURBS method of storing spline
information. However, a NURBS surface expands the string of control points in a second direction resulting
in a grid. In addition, NURBS surfaces have the following characteristics:

¨ Require less data storage than parametric surfaces, but with slightly more computing time

¨ Compatible with IGES conversion

87
¨ Can be output to VDA file format (if created in Mastercam)

Note: Due to limitations with the VDA file format, surfaces that you bring in from another source using the
File, Converters function can be output to VDA only if they are bicubic (mathematical degree 3 by 3). You
can analyze a surface to determine if it is bicubic.

¨ Not associated with their generating curves

Curve-generated

When the system stores a surface as a curve-generated surface, it stores a direct reference back to the
original curves. In addition, curve-generated surfaces have the following characteristics:

¨ Require less data storage than parametric or NURBS surfaces

¨ Associated with their generating curves

Note: Curve-generated surfaces store exact data about their generating curves (rather than
approximations).

Specifying spline and surface type defaults

The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface
Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. The options are:

¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes; also the surfaces defined from them.

¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points; also the
surfaces defined from them.

¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted.

¨ Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted.

While these types will be generated by default, you can also select a type at the time you create the spline
or surface. See Surface types for more information on surface types.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

2. Choose the CAD Settings tab.

3. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu.

4. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

88
Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

Setting the display of surfaces and solids

The Surface Display menu gives you options for specifying how surfaces and solids appear in the graphics
window. While this menu is displayed, current surface display settings (Show back, Back color, and Density)
are shown in the prompt area. You can access the Surface Display menu by choosing Main Menu, Screen,
Surf disp.

Creating curves on surfaces and solids

The Curve menu gives you options for creating lines, arcs, splines on surfaces and solids and for creating
surface curves on surfaces. You can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Curve. Click on the
topics below for more information.

Creating constant parameter curves on a surface

You can create a curve in one or both surface directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the
surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Const param.

2. Choose Options. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
curves than other step methods.

3. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view.

4. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the surface (the
fixed position), then click.

Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor
crosshairs over the point, then click.

5. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected
surface) or Both to create a curve in both directions.

Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to create additional curves.

89
7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In
the following example, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent
the two constant parameter curves created on the surface, one in each direction. The point where the
constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position, or constant parameter.

Creating constant parameter curves on a solid face

You can create a curve in one or both solid face directions at a fixed position (constant parameter) on the
face.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Const param.

2. Choose Options. Select a step method, then check Splines and select a spline type. Choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
curves than other step methods.

3. Choose Solid face.

4. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the solid
face.

Note: You may need to rotate the geometry to bring the arrow into view.

5. Move the base of the arrow to the position you want the curve to pass through on the solid face
(the fixed position), then click.

Note: To enter a point at the position of an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor
crosshairs over the point, then click.

6. Choose OK to create a curve in the current direction (reflected by the arrow on the selected face)
or Both to create a curve in both directions.

Note: You can choose Flip to reverse the current direction before choosing OK.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves.

90
8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In
the following example, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines represent
the two constant parameter curves created on the surface, one in each direction. The point where the
constant parameter curves intersect is the fixed position, or constant parameter.

Creating parametric splines along the patch boundaries of a parametric surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Patch bndy.

2. Select a parametric surface. Mastercam creates parametric splines along the patch boundaries.

3. Repeat step 2 to create splines along the patch boundaries of additional surfaces.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: This function does not work with bicubic (degree 3, or order 4) parametric surfaces, such as those
created with the Create, Rectangle function.

Creating flowline curves on a surface

This function creates multiple curves on a surface in one direction of the surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline.

2. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.

3. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the
direction, then choose OK.

4. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that
Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or
Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area.

5. Choose Options. Select a step method and set the types of curves to create, then choose OK.

91
Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
curves than other step methods.

6. Choose Do it to create the curves.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In
the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines
represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions.

Creating flowline curves on a solid face

This function creates multiple curves on a solid face in one direction of the solid face.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Flowline.

2. Choose Solid face.

3. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the face.

4. Select the curve direction: Choose OK to accept the current direction or choose Flip to reverse the
direction, then choose OK.

5. The prompt area reflects the current method used to calculate the number of curves that
Mastercam will create on the surface. To change the calculation method, choose Number, Dist(ance), or
Toler(ance), then enter a value in the prompt area.

6. Choose Options. Select a step method, then check Splines and select a spline type. Choose OK.

92
Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
curves than other step methods.

7. Choose Do it to create the curves

8. Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create additional curves.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the option.

Note: An easy way to visualize the directions of a surface or solid face is to look at its wireframe display. In
the following examples, the green lines represent the wireframe display of a surface. The red lines
represent flowline curves created on the surface in different directions.

Creating a curve at any position on a surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic.

2. Choose Options. Set the type of entities to create, then choose OK.

3. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

4. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the curve on the surface, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move
the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click.

5. Repeat step 4 to enter additional points through which you want the curve to pass.

Note: The resulting curve passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a
minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the curve.

6. Press [Esc] to create the curve.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create additional curves.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ If you choose to create a spline in step 2, the points that you enter in steps 4 and 5 represent nodes
where the spline lies directly on the surface.

¨ If you choose to create a surface curve in step 2, it lies completely on the surface.

Creating a spline at any position on a solid face

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Dynamic.

2. Choose Options. Check Splines, select a spline type, then choose OK.

3. Choose Solid face.

93
4. Select a solid face in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the face.

5. Move the base of the arrow to position the first endpoint of the spline on the face, then click.

Note: To set the endpoint at the position of an existing point entity, type [S] to activate snapping, move
the cursor crosshairs over the point, then click.

6. Repeat step 5 to enter additional points through which you want the spline to pass.

Note: The resulting spline passes through the points in the order you enter them. You must enter a
minimum of two points, one for each endpoint of the spline.

7. Press [Esc] to create the spline and exit the function.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 7 to create additional splines.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The points that you enter in steps 5 and 6 represent nodes where the resulting spline lies directly on
the solid face.

Creating curves at the intersections of a slice plane with surfaces and solids

This function slices selected surfaces and solids with a plane and creates curves along the intersections of
the plane with the selected entities. You also have options to create the curves at offset positions, to create
curves at a defined spacing interval from the intersections, and to trim the surfaces to the resulting curves.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Slice.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Define the slice plane. Mastercam displays a temporary graphic of the plane in the graphics
window.

4. Set parameters on the Slice Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters.

5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the
surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note:

¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make
in step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the
function on it separately from the other surfaces.

94
¨ The first graphic shows a selected surface and the slice plane that intersects it. The second graphic
shows the resulting curve (red) on the surface, which has been trimmed back to the curve.

Creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids

This function creates curves at the intersections between two sets of surfaces and solids. Mastercam pairs
each entity in the first set with each entity in the second set and creates curves at the intersecting
locations.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Intersect.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces for the first set of entities, then choose
Done.

Note: You can select solids and solid faces in the first set only.

3. Select one or more surfaces for the second set of entities, then choose Done.

4. Set parameters on the Intersection Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters.

5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the
surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click. If prompted again, repeat for a second surface.

95
6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims both sets of surfaces based on the selections you make in
step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the function
on it separately from the other surfaces.

¨ If you choose to intersect only surfaces, you may select them in one set containing a minimum of
two surfaces. In this case, Mastercam attempts to create curves by pairing each surface in the set with
every other surface in the set. In certain instances, however, having only one set of surfaces could prove
more time consuming.

For example, if you have multiple surface walls and a single surface floor in one set, the system looks for
intersections between all walls and the floor. If, however, you select the walls as one set of surfaces and
the floor as the second set of surfaces, the system looks for intersections only between each wall and the
floor.

¨ In order to trim surfaces to the intersection curves, you must select two sets of surfaces and one
set must contain only one surface.

¨ If you choose to create surface curves, Mastercam creates two surface curves for each intersection,
one on each of the intersecting surfaces.

¨ The first graphic shows two shaded intersecting surfaces. The second graphic shows the same
surfaces in wireframe view. The red lines are the curves that were created along the surface intersections.

96
Projecting curves onto surfaces and solids

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Project.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Select one or more chains of curves to project, then choose Done.

4. Set parameters on the Projection Curve menu, then choose Do it to project the curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters.

5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the
surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make
in step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the
function on it separately from the other surfaces.

¨ In the following graphic, the green circle has been projected onto the surface. The red circle is the
resulting curve.

Creating parting line curves on surfaces and solids

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, Part line.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Choose View, then select the view to use to generate the parting line curves.

97
4. Set the remaining parameters on the Parting Line Curve menu, then choose Do it to create the
curves.

Note: Choose Options to access additional parameters.

5. If prompted, select a highlighted surface to trim. Move the base of the arrow to the side of the
surface that you want to keep after trimming, then click.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ If trimming is active, Mastercam trims all of the selected surfaces based on the selection you make
in step 5. If you do not get the trimming results you want on a particular surface, try performing the
function on it separately from the other surfaces.

¨ In the following graphic, the red line represents the parting line curve, where the surface wraps out
of view. The green lines represent the front of the surface (positive surface normal), and the gray lines
represent the back of the surface (negative surface normal).

¨ This function is often used with mold-making.

Creating a curve along one edge of a surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, One edge.

2. Choose Options. Select a Step Method and Spline Type, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
curves than other step methods.

3. Choose Break angle. In the prompt area, enter a break angle value.

Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces.

4. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

5. Move the base of the arrow to the surface edge where you want to create the curve, then click to
create the curve.

98
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional curves along surface edges.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you selected in step
2). However, if the resulting curve is linear, Mastercam outputs a line, and if the resulting curve is round,
Mastercam outputs an arc.

Creating a curve along one edge of a solid

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, One edge.

2. Choose From solid from the One Edge Curve menu.

Note: The other One Edge Curve menu options pertain to creating curves along surface edges and do not
need to be set when creating curves on solid edges.

3. Select a solid edge in the graphics window. Mastercam creates a curve on the selected edge.

4. Repeat step 3 to create additional curves along solid edges, then choose Done.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: Mastercam creates a line, arc, or NURBS spline based on the simplest, yet exact, representation of
the solid edge.

Creating curves along all edges of selected surfaces and solids

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Curve, All edges.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

3. Choose Options. Set Step Method and Spline Type, then choose OK.

Note: Chord height is generally the most precise step method, but it may take longer to calculate the
curves than other step methods.

4. Choose Break angle. In the prompt area, enter a break angle value.

Note: This step is necessary only when creating curves along trimmed surfaces.

5. Choose Do it to create the curves.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

99
Notes:

¨ Steps 3 and 4 affect the creation of curves on surfaces. If your selection in step 2 contains only
solids, you can omit these steps.

¨ For solids, Mastercam creates a line, arc, or NURBS spline based on the simplest, yet exact,
representation of the solid edge.

¨ For surfaces, Mastercam creates a NURBS or parametric spline (depending on the spline type you
selected in step 3). However, if the resulting curve is linear, Mastercam outputs a line, and if the resulting
curve is round, Mastercam outputs an arc.

Specifying spline and surface type defaults

The CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box lets you specify the type of spline or surface
Mastercam will create by default whenever you create a spline or surface. The options are:

¨ Parametric – curves defined by coefficients or nodes; also the surfaces defined from them.

¨ NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline) – curves defined by knots or control points; also the
surfaces defined from them.

¨ Curve-generated or parametric if curve generation is not permitted.

¨ Curve-generated or NURBS if curve generation is not permitted.

While these types will be generated by default, you can also select a type at the time you create the spline
or surface. See Surface types for more information on surface types.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

2. Choose the CAD Settings tab.

3. Select the default spline and surface type from the Spline/Surface creation type drop down menu.

4. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

100
Deleting and restoring entities

The Delete menu gives you options for deleting entities and restoring deleted entities. You can access the
Delete menu by choosing Delete from the Main Menu. Click on the topics below for more information.
Deleting selected entities

1. Choose Main Menu, Delete.

2. Use the mouse to select single entities to delete or use a selection method from the Delete menu
to select multiple entities.

3. If prompted that there are entities associated with your selection, choose Yes to delete both the
selected entities and the associated entities or No to cancel the delete command.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: For information on how to use the selection methods available in step 2, see Entity selection.

Deleting duplicate entities

1. Choose Main Menu, Delete, Duplicate.

2. Choose All to define the duplicate entities to delete based on entity type. The Delete Duplicates
dialog box appears.

3. Choose the attributes for the duplicate entities to delete, then choose OK.

4. Mastercam highlights the duplicate entities and displays the number of each type of duplicate
entity in the prompt area. Press [Enter] to delete the duplicate entities and return to the Delete menu.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: If necessary, you can recover the deleted entities. For more information, see Restoring deleted
entities.

Deleting duplicate entities when opening files

Duplicate entities make files larger than necessary and interfere with chaining. The Start/Exit tab of the
System Configuration dialog box lets you automatically delete duplicate entities when a file is opened using
the File, Get or File, Merge functions. Mastercam notifies you of the number of entities deleted.

1. Choose Main Menu, Screen, Configure. The System Configuration dialog box opens.

2. Choose the Start/Exit tab.

3. Check Delete duplicate entities when saving to delete entities, or clear it to leave duplicate entities
in the file.

4. Do one of the following:

¨ Enter or choose other defaults.

101
¨ Choose OK to enact all settings from all tabs and close the dialog box.

Choose Yes to update the current Configuration File. Choose No to use the settings only for the current
Mastercam session.

¨ Choose Cancel to abandon all changes made to this as well as to other tabs and close the dialog
box.

Restoring deleted entities

The Undelete menu gives you options for restoring deleted entities to the graphics window. Mastercam
restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted. Click on the topics below for more
information.

Restoring a single deleted entity

¨ Choose Main Menu, Delete, Undelete, Single.

Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted.

Restoring multiple entities

1. Choose Main Menu, Delete, Undelete, Number.

2. In the prompt area, enter the number of entities to restore.

Note: Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted.

Restoring all entities of a specified definition

1. Choose Main Menu, Delete, Undelete, All.

2. Use the All menu to define the entities to restore based on entity type and attributes.

Notes:

¨ Mastercam restores entities in the reverse order in which they were deleted.

¨ For information on using the All menu, see Selecting all entities of a specified type.

Note: You can set the number of deleted entities that can be restored on the Allocations tab of the System
Configuration dialog box (Screen, Configure).

102
Transforming entities
The Xform menu gives you options for moving entities and optionally creating copies of them by mirroring,
rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, and rolling them. With some functions, you have the
option to join the copied entities to the originals. When you perform a transform function, Mastercam
creates a temporary group from the original entities and a result from the transformed entities. For more
information, see Working with groups.

You can access the Xform menu by choosing Xform from the Main Menu. Click on the topics below for
more information.

Mirroring entities
Mirroring is the process of creating mirror images of entities by reflecting them symmetrically with respect
to a defined axis. You have the option to move or copy the original entities within the drawing. You can
mirror all geometric and drafting entity types. When your selection includes drafting notes or labels, you
have the option to mirror the text or to prevent the text from being reversed or turned upside down in the
mirrored image.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Mirror.

2. Select one or more entities to mirror, then choose Done. Mastercam displays the Mirror menu.

3. Set the mirror axis to the X axis, Y axis, a line or 2 points in the graphics window.

4. On the Mirror dialog box, select the type of operation to perform: Move, Copy, or Join.

5. If your selection contains one or more drafting notes or labels, Mastercam enables the Mirror label
and note text option. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To prevent mirrored text from being turned upside down or reversed, clear the option.

¨ To mirror the text, check the option.

6. Choose OK to mirror the entities.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to mirror additional entities.

8. Press [Esc]to exit the function.

Note: To see graphics showing how different mirror axes affect the transformed entities, see Defining a
mirror axis.

Rotating entities
Rotating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities around a point by a
defined angle. The angle is calculated relative to the horizontal axis of the current construction plane. A
positive angle results in a counterclockwise rotation, and a negative angle results in a clockwise rotation.
You can rotate all geometric and drafting entity types.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Rotate.

2. Select one or more entities to rotate, then choose Done.

103
3. Enter a point to rotate the entities about.

4. On the Rotate dialog box, select the type of operation to perform: Move, Copy, or Join.

5. Enter a value for Rotation angle and Number of steps, then choose OK to rotate the entities.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to rotate additional entities.

7. Press [Esc]to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ The following graphic shows geometry rotated about the yellow point. The color red indicates the
group of entities selected for the transform operation. The color purple indicates the result of the
transform operation after the original entities are rotated by negative 45 degrees (clockwise).

Scaling entities using a single scale factor

Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. When a single
scale factor is used, the increase or decrease is proportional along all axes (XYZ). The entities change size
while maintaining their original shape. You can use this function to scale all geometric and drafting entity
types.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Scale.

2. Select one or more entities to scale, then choose Done.

3. Enter a point in the graphics window. The entities will be scaled relative to this point. The Scale
dialog box displays.

4. On the Scale dialog box, select the type of operation to perform: Move, Copy, or Join.

5. Select Uniform in the scaling area.

6. Enter a value for Scale factor and Number of steps, then choose OK to scale the entities.

104
Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object. A scale factor less than 1 shrinks the object. A scale
factor equal to 1 produces no change in size.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ For information on scaling entities using multiple scale factors, see Scaling entities using multiple
scale factors.

¨ When scaling associative dimensions, select only the geometry to scale, not the dimension. If the
auto regenerate feature is turned on, Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry.
If the auto regenerate feature is off, Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty, in which case, you can
manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. Scaling both the geometry and the associated
dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. For more information, see
Associating drafting entities with geometry.

¨ The following graphics show two examples with the same geometry scaled about different points
(yellow). The color red indicates the group
of entities selected for each transform operation. The color purple indicates the result of each transform
operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size).

Scaling entities using multiple scale factors

Scaling increases or decreases the size of entities by a factor relative to a defined point. You can apply a
different scale factor to each of the axes (XYZ). The entities not only change size but may change shape as
well, appearing to be stretched or squeezed from their original shape. You can use this function to scale all
geometric and drafting entity types except solids.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Scale.

2. Select one or more entities to scale, then choose Done.

3. Enter a point in the graphics window. The entities will be scaled relative to this point. The Scale
dialog box displays.

4. On the Scale dialog box, select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy.

105
5. Enter the Scale factor to use in each direction (XYZ), and then choose OK to scale the entities.

Note: A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the object in the defined direction. A scale factor less than 1
shrinks the object in the defined direction. A scale factor equal to 1 produces no change in size in the
defined direction.

6. If your selection contained one or more arcs and you used different XYZ scale factors, Mastercam
converts the arcs to NURBS splines and displays the number of converted arcs in the prompt area. Press
[Enter] to continue.

7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to scale additional entities.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ To increase or decrease entities by the same amount in all directions, enter the same value for the
XYZ scale factors, or see Scaling entities using a single scale factor.

¨ When scaling associative dimensions, select only the geometry to scale, not the dimension. If the
auto regenerate feature is turned on, Mastercam will update the dimension to match the scaled geometry.
If the auto regenerate feature is off, Mastercam marks the dimension as dirty, in which case, you can
manually regenerate the dimension to the correct value. Scaling both the geometry and the associated
dimension causes the dimension value to no longer match the geometry. For more information, see
Associating drafting entities with geometry.

¨ The following graphic shows geometry scaled about a point (yellow) using different X and Y scale
factors. The color red indicates the group
of entities selected for the transform operation. The color purple indicates the result of the transform
operation after the original entities are scaled by a factor of 3 (triple their original size) in the Y direction
and .75 (75% of their original size) in the X direction.

106
Translating entities
Translating is the process of moving selected entities or one or more copies of the entities to new positions
without altering the orientation, size, or shape of the entities. You can move the entities within a plane or
from one plane to another plane. You can translate all geometric and drafting entity types.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Translate.

2. Select one or more entities to translate, then choose Done. Mastercam displays the Translate
Direction menu.

3. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates, polar coordinates, two points, or two
points relative to two views.

4. On the Translate dialog box, select the type of operation to perform (Move, Copy, or Join) and
enter a value for Number of steps. Choose OK to translate the entities.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate additional entities.

6. Press [Esc]to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ To view a graphic of a translation between views, see Defining a translation direction.

¨ You can quickly (but less precisely) translate entities using the Modify, Drag function.

Offsetting a single curve

When Mastercam offsets a single curve, it displaces it by a defined distance and direction. The direction is
perpendicular to the curve at every point along the curve relative to the current construction plane.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Offset.

2. On the Offset dialog box, select the type of operation to perform: Move or Copy.

3. Enter a value for Offset distance and Number of steps, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

4. Select a line, arc, or spline in the graphics window.

5. Click on one side or the other of the selected entity to indicate the offset direction. Mastercam
offsets the curve.

Note: If you entered a negative offset distance on the Offset dialog box, Mastercam moves the entity in
the opposite direction from the one you indicate.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to offset additional curves or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

107
¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may
cause the spline to self-intersect.

¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle, depending on the offset direction.
Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller
circle.

¨ The Create, Line, Parallel function gives you several options for offsetting single lines. For more
information, see Creating parallel lines.

Offsetting chains of curves

When Mastercam offsets chains of curves, it displaces them by a defined distance and direction and
optionally a depth. The offset is perpendicular to the chains of curves at every position along the curves
relative to the current construction plane.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Ofs ctour.

2. Select one or more chains of curves, then choose Done. Mastercam opens the Offset Contour
dialog box.

Note: When making your selection, it is important to pay attention to the chaining direction. The offset
direction that you will set in a following step is calculated relative to the chaining direction for each
selected chain.

3. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy.

4. Enter a value for Number of steps to set the number of times to perform the operation.

5. Set the offset direction by choosing Right or Left in the Offset section of the dialog box.

6. Enter a value for Distance in the Offset section of the dialog box.

Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the XY directions (relative to the current
construction plane). You can enter a positive value only.

7. Enter a value for Offset depth and indicate whether the depth is Absolute or Incremental.

Note: This value is the distance that the chains will be offset in the Z direction (relative to the current
construction plane). You can enter a positive, negative, or zero value.

8. Set the remaining parameters on the Offset Contour dialog box, then choose OK to offset the
chains.

9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 to offset additional chains of curves, or press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

108
¨ Offsetting a spline by a distance greater than the radius of the smallest curve in the spline may
cause the spline to self-intersect.

¨ Offsetting an arc or circle creates a larger or smaller arc or circle, depending on the offset direction.
Offsetting outside the perimeter creates a larger circle. Offsetting inside the perimeter creates a smaller
circle.

¨ When offsetting 2D chains using a depth other than zero, you can define the offset distance by
entering a value for Taper angle. This parameter is directly related to the Distance parameter in the Offset
section of the dialog box. The following graphic illustrates this relationship.

Stretching entities

Stretching is the process of moving (translating) entities or one or more copies of the entities to new
positions and optionally lengthening or shortening selected lines. Lines are stretched when they cross or
intersect the window used to select the entities. The line endpoints that lie within the selection window are
translated, while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original positions. You
can perform the Stretch function on all geometric and drafting entities except solids.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Stretch.

2. Use the Stretch Menu to select entities to stretch.

3. Define a translation direction using rectangular coordinates, polar coordinates, two points, or two
points relative to two views.

4. On the Stretch dialog box, select the type of operation to perform (Move or Copy) and enter a
value for Number of steps. Choose OK to translate/stretch the entities.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to translate/stretch additional entities.

6. Press [Esc]to exit the function.

109
Notes:

¨ The following graphics show a rectangle that is stretched out of shape (bottom graphic) when two
of its lines are intersected by a selection window (top graphic) and translated to a new position.

Rolling and unrolling entities

The Roll function lets you wrap lines, arcs, and splines about an axis as though around a cylinder or unwrap
rolled entities to make them lie flat. To fit entities in a cylindrical shape when rolling them or to flatten
entities when unrolling them, Mastercam breaks the entities relative to an angle tolerance. It then
generates new geometry, called target geometry, based on the break points. You can choose to create
points at the break points or lines or splines between the break points.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Roll.

2. Select one or more entities, then choose Done. Mastercam opens the Roll dialog box.

Note: Your selection can include points, lines, arcs, and splines.

3. Indicate the type of operation to perform by choosing Move or Copy.

4. Determine the type of transformation to perform: Roll or Unroll.

5. Indicate the axis to transform the entities about. In Mastercam Design, Mill, and Wire, you can
choose X axis or Y axis. In Mastercam Lathe, you can choose Z axis or X axis.

Note: The rotation axis is relative to the current construction plane.

6. Indicate the direction to transform the entities about the axis by choosing CW or CCW.

7. Enter a value for Rotary diameter. This value determines the size of the cylindrical shape about
which the geometry is transformed.

8. Enter a value for Angle tolerance. This value determines how closely the transformed (target)
geometry fits the original geometry. A smaller value results in a more precise fit.

9. Indicate the type of target geometry to create by choosing Points, Lines, Splines, or Nurbs.

110
10. Set the position of the target geometry by taking one of the following actions:

¨ To position the target geometry relative to an angle value, choose Angle, then enter a value in the
text box.

¨ To position the target geometry relative to a translation vector, choose Associate pts, then choose
Select. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Define the translation vector by entering a point to
translate from and a point to translate to. After you enter two points, the dialog box reopens.

11. Choose OK to close the dialog box and transform the geometry.

Squashing entities

The Squash dialog box allows you to project selected points, lines, arcs, and splines to the current
construction plane. This means you can select entities in various positions in 3D space and squash them
into a flat, 2D plane. The system converts arcs to NURBS splines if they are not parallel to the construction
plane.

1. Choose Main Menu, Xform, Squash.

2. Select the entities to project using the General Selection menu and choose Done. The Squash
dialog box displays.

3. Select an operation: Move, Copy, or Join.

4. Enter the Depth or choose:

¨ The Construction depth check box (so that the projected entities remain at the current
construction depth)

¨ The Construction attributes check box (so that attributes of the projected entities use the current
construction color, level, line style, and line width)

Note: You can choose either or both check boxes.

5. Choose OK.

6. Repeat steps 2 thru 5 to project additional entities.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

111
Modifying entities

The Modify menu gives you options for modifying entities. You can access the Modify menu by choosing
Modify from the Main Menu. Click on the topics below for more information.

Filleting curves

The Fillet menu gives you options for filleting curves. When you fillet curves, you create an arc of a defined
radius tangent to the curves. By default, Mastercam trims the curves to the fillet, although you have the
option to turn off trimming.
You can access the Fillet menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Fillet or by choosing Main Menu, Create,
Fillet. Click on the menu and topics below for more information.

Radius - Determines the size of the resulting fillets.

Angle - Determines the sweep of the fillet arc. This option toggles between S, L, and F. Choose S (Smaller)
to create fillets that are smaller than 180 degrees, L (Larger) to create fillets that are larger than 180
degrees, or F (Full) to create fillets that are full circles (360 degrees).

Trim - Determines whether Mastercam trims the selected curves to the fillet. This option is a Yes/No
toggle. Choose Y to activate trimming or N to deactivate trimming.

Chain - Displays the Chaining Methods menu where you can select chains of curves to create fillets at
sharp corners along the chains. See Filleting corners along chains of curves for more information.

Determines which corners are used to create fillets along the chains of curves. This option toggles between
A, P, and N. Choose A to create fillets along all corners, P to create fillets at positive, or counterclockwise
(CCW) corners (relative to the chaining direction), or N to create fillets at negative, or clockwise (CW)
corners (relative to the chaining direction).

112
Notes:

¨ This option applies only when Filleting corners along chains of curves.

¨ The ability to fillet only inside or outside corners of a chained boundary is particularly useful during
geometry creation for wire EDM parts (punches and dies). These parts often require different radius values
on inside versus outside corners in order to provide adequate corner clearance.

Trimming curves

The Trim menu gives you options for trimming curves to one another. Mastercam trims curves by cutting
them back or extending them at their intersections; however, Mastercam does not extend splines beyond
their original endpoints. The curves must lie in the same Cplane, or if the Cplane is set to 3D, the curves
must have an actual intersection. Finally, in cases where the intersection between two curves offers
variable solutions, be sure to select each curve on the part of the curve that you want to keep.

You can access the Trim menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Trim.

Trimming one curve

This function trims one curve to its intersection with a second curve without modifying the second entity.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, 1 entity.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline to trim.

3. Select a line, arc, or spline to trim to.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The following graphics show the selection of a vertical line trimmed to the horizontal line. The result
varies depending on where you select the line.

113
Trimming two curves

This function trims two curves to their intersection.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, 2 entities.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline as the first entity to trim.

3. Select a line, arc, or spline as the second entity to trim.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The following graphics show the selection of a two lines trimmed to their intersection. The result
varies depending on where you select the lines.

Trimming three curves

This function trims three curves. The first two curves that you select are trimmed to the third selected
curve, which acts as a trimming curve. The third curve is then trimmed to the first two curves.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, 3 entities.

2. Select two lines, arcs, or splines to trim.

3. Select a line, arc, or spline to trim to.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional entities.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: This function is useful for trimming two lines to a circle that is tangent to both lines, as shown in the
following graphic. The arc is selected last, and the results vary depending on whether you select to keep
the top or the bottom of the arc.

114
Trimming a curve to a point

This function trims a curve to a point or any defined position in the graphics window. If the point that you
enter does not lie on the selected entity, Mastercam calculates the closest position on the entity and trims
the entity to that point.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, To point.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. Enter a point to trim to.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to trim additional curves.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The following graphic shows an arc that is trimmed (in this case, extended) to a point that does not
lie on the curve.

Trimming multiple curves to a single trimming curve

This function trims multiple curves to a selected trimming curve without modifying the trimming curve.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Many.

2. Select one or more lines, arcs, and splines to trim, then choose Done.

115
3. Select a line, arc, or spline to trim to.

4. Select an entity on the side of the trimming curve that you want to keep.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to trim additional curves.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The following graphic shows two examples, each containing four arcs that are trimmed to a line
(red). The dashed green line shows the portion of each arc that is trimmed, which varies depending on
which side of the curves you select to keep.

Closing an arc to form a full circle

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Close arc.

2. Select an arc that is less than 360 degrees.

3. Repeat step 2 to close additional arcs.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Dividing a line or arc between two trimming curves

This function trims a line or arc into two disjointed segments by removing the segment that lies between
two dividing curves.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Trim, Divide.

2. Select a line or arc to divide.

3. Select any two lines, arcs, or splines to use as dividing curves.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to divide additional curves

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: The following graphic shows a line that is trimmed between two arcs.

116
Breaking entities

The Break menu gives you option for breaking curves into multiple segments and for breaking drafting
entities, crosshatches, and copious data into geometric entities. You can access the Break menu by
choosing Main Menu, Modify, Break.

Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined point

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, 2 pieces.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. Enter a point where you want to break the selected entity. The system breaks the entity into two
segments.

Note: If you enter a break point that does not lie on the selected curve, the system finds the location on
the curve that is closest to the point and breaks the curve at that point.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Breaking a curve into two segments at a defined length

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, At length.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline near the endpoint that you want to use to calculate length.

3. In the prompt area, enter a value for length. Mastercam breaks the curve at the defined length
from the selected endpoint.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to break additional entities.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Breaking a line into multiple segments

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Mny pieces.

2. Select a line in the graphics window.

3. Take one of the following actions:

117
¨ To break the line into a defined number of segments, choose Num seg. In the prompt area, enter
the number of segments.

¨ To break the line into segments of a defined length, choose Seg length. In the prompt area, enter
the segment length.

4. Choose Do it to break the line.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional lines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Breaking an arc into multiple arc or line segments

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Mny pieces.

2. Select an arc in the graphics window.

3. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To break the arc into a defined number of segments, choose Num seg. In the prompt area, enter
the number of segments.

¨ To break the arc into segments of a defined length, choose Seg length. In the prompt area, enter
the segment length.

4. Set Arcs to Y to break the arc into arc segments or N to break it into line segments.

5. Choose Do it to break the arc.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to break additional arcs.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Breaking a spline into multiple line segments

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Mny pieces.

2. Select a spline in the graphics window.

3. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To break the spline into a defined number of segments, choose by Length, Num seg. In the prompt
area, enter the number of segments.

¨ To break the spline into segments of a defined length, choose by Length, Seg length. In the prompt
area, enter the segment length.

118
¨ To break the spline based on a chord height tolerance, choose by Error, Error. In the prompt area,
enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how closely the resulting segments fit the
original spline.

Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. A larger value results in a looser fit.

4. Choose Do it to break the spline.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to break additional splines.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Breaking curves at their intersections with other curves

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, At inters.

2. Select one or more lines, arcs, or splines, then choose Done. Mastercam displays temporary points
at each break point.

Note: Press [F3] to remove the display points.

Breaking 2D splines into arc and line segments

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Spl to arcs.

2. Select one or more 2D splines, then choose Done.

3. Choose Error. In the prompt area, enter the chord height tolerance (distance) that determines how
closely the resulting arc and line segments fit the original splines.

Note: A smaller value results in a closer fit. A larger value results in a looser fit.

4. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To keep the splines, set Dispose to K.

¨ To blank the splines, set Dispose to B.

¨ To delete the splines, set Dispose to D.

5. Choose Do it to break the selected splines.

Note: Mastercam does not break 3D splines, 2D splines that do not lie in the current Cplane, or 2D splines
that lie in undefined views.

Breaking drafting entities into geometric entities

This function breaks drafting dimensions, notes, labels, witness lines, and leader lines into lines, arcs, and
NURBS splines.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Draft/line.

119
2. Select one or more drafting entities. Mastercam breaks the entities and exits the function.

Breaking hatch entities into lines

This function breaks lines in a crosshatch pattern into line entities. The newly created lines have the same
line style as the crosshatch pattern.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Hatch/line.

2. Select a crosshatch to break.

3. Repeat step 2 to break additional crosshatches.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Breaking copious data into points and lines

This function breaks a copious data entity into points or lines, depending on the form of the copious data
entity.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, Cdata/line.

2. Select a copious data entity to break.

3. Repeat step 2 to break additional entities.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: Copious data is an entity type that originates in an IGES file and represents a collection of geometric
forms (points and lines). You have the option to convert copious data to points and lines when you read an
IGES file into Mastercam.

Breaking the geometry perpendicular to the STCW position

In Wire EDM, it is a general rule of thumb to lead in to the part geometry perpendicular to the contour.
While the STCW position may appear to be perpendicular to the contour, Mastercam Wire requires a start
of contour to begin cutting the part. By breaking the geometry, you create an entity endpoint that can be
used for the start of contour when chaining.
Choosing Main Menu, Modify, Break, STCW position opens the STCW Position Settings menu. The options
in this menu let you choose to break a line or an arc at a point perpendicular to the current start, thread,
cut, or work origin position.

Note: Mastercam Wire allows you to set a chaining option "Break closest entity to thread point." When
this option is activated and you chain geometry for a wirepath, Mastercam Wire automatically breaks the
entity that is closest to the thread point, perpendicular to the thread point. Using the chaining option to
break the geometry is equivalent to using this procedure.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Break, STCW position.

120
2. Choose the from the menu the S, T, C, or W position perpendicular to which you want to break the
geometry.

3. Select the entity to break.

4. Choose Esc when done.

Note: If Mastercam Wire displays the message "cannot break line or arc past its endpoints," the entity you
are trying to break cannot be broken perpendicular to the S, T, C, or W position without extending the
entity. Choose another entity or move the S, T, C, or W position.

Creating tabs with Modify, Break, Make tab

Choosing Main Menu, Modify, Break, Make tab is an alternate method of creating a tab on a wirepath. To
make a tab, this method breaks the selected entity at the point that you choose and marks the entity
endpoint with a glue stop or program stop. Mastercam Wire inserts the stop code when it generates the
wirepath. You can view the stop code when backplotting the wirepath.
Note: While the Modify, Break, Make tab function provides continuity for users of previous versions of
Mastercam Wire, we recommend creating tabs using the tab parameters in the Cuts tab of the contour or
4-axis wirepath dialog box. The parameters allow for easy modification using associativity, and also allow
you to easily specify lead in/out moves for the tab cuts.

Breakcir C-Hook

When you run the Breakcir C-Hook, the system automatically breaks all arcs that have a sweep of +/- 360
degrees and that match the main system color into two 180-degree arcs. This function helps prepare
geometry for the post processor by eliminating full circles. The files for this C-Hook include:

¨ Breakcir.dll

¨ Breakcir.txt

¨ Breakcir.doc

Joining segments of broken curves

This function joins collinear lines, arcs that have the same center and radius, or splines that were originally
created as the same entity.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Join.

2. Select a line, arc, or spline.

3. Select another entity of the same type.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to join additional curves.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

121
Notes:

¨ This function is useful for joining curves that were broken or trimmed.

¨ If the two entities that you select to join have different attributes, the system creates the new
entity using the attributes of the first entity that you select.

Modifying surface normals

The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. You can
access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Normal. The plus sign indicates the currently selected
menu option. Click on the topics below for more information.

Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane

This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward, or
positive, normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Normal, Set.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the
number of reversals.

3. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ For more information about surface normals, see About surface normals.

¨ You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Set norms

Reversing the surface normal direction

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Normal, Reverse.

2. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction.

3. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ For more information about surface normals, see About surface normals.

¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it, see Checking and optionally reversing the
surface normal direction.

122
Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Normal, Dynamic.

2. Select a surface. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.

3. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. The arrow points in the outward,
or positive, normal direction based on the cursor position.

Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the
current graphics view. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you; a smaller
arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you.

4. When you can see the arrow clearly, click to set its position. Mastercam displays a direction menu.

5. Set the outward, or positive, surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions:

¨ Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction).

¨ Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction), then choose OK.

Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first, see Reversing the surface
normal direction.

Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface

Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point
on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS). This menu gives you options for
modifying the position or weight of the selected control point, which changes the shape of the NURBS
entity that is defined by the control point.

Dragging a control point to a new position

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS.

2. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. The system highlights the control points in the graphics
window.

3. Select a control point.

4. Choose Dynamic.

5. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point.

6. Enter an ending point to set its position. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point
relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter.

123
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points.

Note: If the control points are no longer displayed, you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point, which reflects the
control point’s center of influence. You cannot modify these points. If you select one in step 3, Mastercam
automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

Moving a control point to a defined position

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS.

2. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. The system highlights the control points in the graphics
window.

3. Select a control point.

4. Choose Point entry.

5. Enter a point for the position of the control point. Mastercam modifies the position of the control
point.

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points.

Note: If the control points are no longer displayed, you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point, which reflects the
control point’s center of influence. You cannot modify these points. If you select one in step 3, Mastercam
automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

Modifying the weight of a control point

You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. Examples of rational NURBS
entities include: NURBS ellipses, NURBS revolved surfaces, arcs that were converted to NURBS format,
curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format, and parametric revolved
surfaces that were converted to NURBS format.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS.

124
2. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. The system highlights the control points in the graphics
window.

3. Select a control point.

4. Choose Weight.

5. In the prompt area, enter a value for the weight of the control point.

Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. A higher value
pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point, and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the
control point.

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points.

Note: If the control points are no longer displayed, you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point, which reflects the
control point’s center of influence. You cannot modify these points. If you select one in step 3, Mastercam
automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

Converting curves and surfaces to NURBS format

This function converts lines, arcs, and parametric splines to NURBS splines and curve-generated and
parametric surfaces to NURBS surfaces.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, X to NURBS.

2. Select one or more curves or surfaces, then choose Done. Mastercam converts the selected entities
to NURBS format.

3. Repeat step 2 to convert additional entities.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Extending entities

The Extend menu gives you options for extending lines, arcs, splines, and surfaces. You can access the
Extend menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Extend.

Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Length.

125
2. In the prompt area, enter a value for length.

Note: A positive value extends the entity, and a negative value trims the entity.

3. Select a line, arc, or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim.

4. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Extending a surface by a defined length

This function extends a surface by a defined length. You can extend the surface linearly or following the
curvature of the surface. When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates the extended surface as a new
surface, and you can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Surface.

2. Set Linear to Y to extend the surface linearly or to N to extend the surface according to the
curvature of the surface.

3. Set To plane to N.

Note: This step is not necessary if Linear is set to N.

4. Choose Length. In the prompt area, enter the length to extend the surface.

5. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu, as needed.

6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend, then click.

8. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

Note: You can perform this step repeatedly to extend the surface incrementally by the defined length.

9. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to extend additional surfaces.

10. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Extend.

¨ When possible, Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric,
NURBS, or curve-generated) as the original surface. However, the system cannot extend all surfaces
precisely. For example, you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve-

126
generated. In such cases, Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Choosing Yes tells the system to
create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

Extending a surface to a plane

This function extends a surface linearly to a defined plane. When Mastercam extends a surface, it creates
the extended surface as a new surface, and you can choose to keep, blank, or delete the original surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Surface.

2. Set Linear to Y.

3. Set To plane to Y.

4. Choose Plane. Use the Define Plane menu to define the plane to extend the surface to.

5. Set other parameters on the Extend Surface menu, as needed.

6. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a temporary arrow on the surface.

7. Move the base of the arrow to the edge to extend, then click.

8. Choose Do it to extend the surface.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You can extend trimmed surfaces only along untrimmed edges.

¨ You can also access this function by choosing Main Menu, Create, Surface, Trim/extend, Extend.

¨ When possible, Mastercam creates the extended surface using the same surface type (parametric,
NURBS, or curve-generated) as the original surface. However, the system cannot extend all surfaces
precisely. For example, you cannot extend curve-generated surfaces linearly and have them remain curve-
generated. In such cases, Mastercam displays the prompt shown below. Choosing Yes tells the system to
create a NURBS approximation of the surface. Choosing No tells the system not to extend the surface.

Dragging entities to new positions in the graphics window

The Drag dialog box gives you options for quickly and dynamically moving entities in the graphics window
by translating, rotating, and stretching them. You can access the Drag dialog box by choosing Main Menu,
Modify, Drag. Click on the topics below for more information.

Dragging entities using translation

This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities to a new position in
the graphics window.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Drag.

127
2. Select the geometry to transform.

3. Choose Done. The Drag dialog box displays.

4. Select one of the Operation functions:

¨ Move – Select this option to move the selected entities.

¨ Copy – Select this option to make a copy of the selected entities.

5. Enter Step Parameters values:

¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. When in translate mode, use the + and
– keys to rotate while dragging the entity with the mouse.

¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis for the translation. Mastercam returns you to the graphics
window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along the
selected axis.

6. Choose Translate.

7. Choose OK.

8. Select the starting point.

9. Drag the entities in the graphics window, then click to set their position.

10. If desired, use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities:

¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged
incrementally, using the + and – keys.

¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally.

¨ [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode.

¨ [S] – Snap – Opens the Point Entry menu which allows you to snap the selected entity to a defined
position.

¨ [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode.

¨ [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically.

¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in
either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

¨ [-] – CW - Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag
dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

11. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

128
Dragging entities using rotation

This function quickly and dynamically moves selected entities or a copy of the entities by rotating the
entities about a point.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Drag.

2. Select the geometry to rotate.

3. Choose Done. The Drag dialog box displays.

4. Select one of the Operation functions:

¨ Move – Select this option to move the selected entities.

¨ Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities.

5. Enter Step Parameters values:

¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated as you drag the entity with the mouse.

¨ XY - Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. Mastercam returns you to the
graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along
the selected axis while rotating the entity with the mouse. You can use the + and – keys to translate the
entity while rotating.

6. Choose Rotate

7. Choose OK.

8. Select the starting point.

9. Drag the entities in the graphics window, then click to set their position.

10. If desired, use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities:

¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged
incrementally, using the + and – keys.

¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally.

¨ [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode.

¨ [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position.

¨ [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode.

¨ [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically.

129
¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in
either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

¨ [-] – CW - Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag
dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 to transform the same set of selected entities or steps 2 through 10 to
transform a new set of entities.

12. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Dragging entities using stretch methods

This function quickly and dynamically moves (translates) selected entities or copies of the entities to new
positions and optionally stretches (lengthens or shortens) selected lines. Lines are stretched when they
cross or intersect the window used to select the entities. The line endpoints that lie within the selection
window are translated, while the endpoints that lie outside the selection window maintain their original
positions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Drag.

2. Choose Window, and draw a window around the lines you wish to stretch.

3. Choose Done. The Drag dialog box displays.

4. Select one of the Operation functions:

¨ Move – Select this option to move the selected entities.

¨ Copy – Select this option to move a copy of the selected entities.

5. Enter Step Parameters values:

¨ Angle – Enter the angle at which the entity will be rotated. (Use the + or – keys to rotate as the
entity is being stretched with the mouse.)

¨ XY – Enter X or Y to select an axis to translate the entity along. Mastercam returns you to the
graphics window to select a point on the entity that determines the value to be used for translating along
the selected axis while stretching the entity with the mouse. You can use the + and – keys to translate the
entity while stretching.

6. Choose Rotate or Translate, and select Stretch.

7. Choose OK.

8. Select the starting point.

9. Drag the entities in the graphics window, then click to set their position.

130
10. If desired, use one of the following option keys while dragging the entities:

¨ [A] – Angle – Prompts you to enter an angle value at which the entity will be dragged
incrementally, using the + and – keys.

¨ [H] – Horizontal – Drags the selected entity horizontally.

¨ [R] – Rotate – Toggles the Drag function from the Translate mode.

¨ [S] – Snap – Snaps the selected entity to a defined position.

¨ [T] – Translate – Toggles the Drag function from the Rotate mode.

¨ [V] – Vertical – Drags the selected entity vertically.

¨ [+] – CCW – Drags the selected entity in a counterclockwise direction at the angle specified in
either the Drag dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

¨ [-] – CW - Drags the selected entity in a clockwise direction at the angle specified in either the Drag
dialog box or the [A] Angle option.

11. Repeat steps 2 through 10 to stretch additional entities.

12. Press [Esc] to exit the function

Note: While the Drag function serves as a quick way to move entities in the graphics window, the following
Xform functions offer more advanced and precise transformation methods:
Xform, Translate
Xform, Rotate
Xform, Stretch

Creating arcs from circular splines

This function creates arcs based on the geometry of circular-shaped splines.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cnv to arcs.

2. Select one or more circular-shaped splines, then choose Done.

3. Set parameters on the Modify Circular Splines to Arcs menu, then choose Do it to create the arcs.

4. Mastercam displays the number of arcs that were successfully created. Press [Enter] to erase the
message.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: This function is particularly useful if geometry that is supposed to denote circles or arcs is read into
Mastercam as splines during a file conversion. If you later want to reference the centers of the circular
geometry or dimension the circles, you can more easily and accurately determine do so if they are arcs
instead of splines.

131
Extending or trimming a curve by a defined length

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Extend, Length.

2. In the prompt area, enter a value for length.

Note: A positive value extends the entity, and a negative value trims the entity.

3. Select a line, arc, or spline close to the endpoint that you want to extend or trim.

4. Repeat step 3 to extend or trim additional curves by the defined length.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Changing the shape of a NURBS spline or surface

Mastercam displays the Modify NURBS Cpts menu when you are in the process of modifying a control point
on a NURBS spline or NURBS surface (Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS). This menu gives you options for
modifying the position or weight of the selected control point, which changes the shape of the NURBS
entity that is defined by the control point.

Dragging a control point to a new position

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS.

2. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. The system highlights the control points in the graphics
window.

3. Select a control point.

4. Choose Dynamic.

5. Enter a starting point to begin dragging the control point.

6. Enter an ending point to set its position. Mastercam modifies the position of the control point
relative to the position of the starting and ending points that you enter.

7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to modify additional control points.

Note: If the control points are no longer displayed, you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function.

132
¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point, which reflects the
control point’s center of influence. You cannot modify these points. If you select one in step 3, Mastercam
automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

Moving a control point to a defined position

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS.

2. Select a NURBS spline or NURBS surface. The system highlights the control points in the graphics
window.

3. Select a control point.

4. Choose Point entry.

5. Enter a point for the position of the control point. Mastercam modifies the position of the control
point.

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points.

Note: If the control points are no longer displayed, you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point, which reflects the
control point’s center of influence. You cannot modify these points. If you select one in step 3, Mastercam
automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

Modifying the weight of a control point

You can modify the weight of a control point for rational NURBS entities only. Examples of rational NURBS
entities include: NURBS ellipses, NURBS revolved surfaces, arcs that were converted to NURBS format,
curve-generated revolved surfaces that were converted to NURBS format, and parametric revolved
surfaces that were converted to NURBS format.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Cpts NURBS.

2. Select a rational NURBS spline or surface. The system highlights the control points in the graphics
window.

3. Select a control point.

4. Choose Weight.

5. In the prompt area, enter a value for the weight of the control point.

133
Note: The weight of a control point affects its influence on the NURBS entity that it defines. A higher value
pulls the NURBS entity toward the control point, and a lower value pushes the NURBS entity away from the
control point.

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to modify additional control points.

Note: If the control points are no longer displayed, you may need to press [Esc] and return to step 2.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ You cannot undo [Alt+U] this function.

¨ For each control point on a NURBS surface there is a corresponding green point, which reflects the
control point’s center of influence. You cannot modify these points. If you select one in step 3, Mastercam
automatically selects the corresponding control point to modify.

About surface normals

A surface normal is a vector (direction) that is perpendicular to the tangent plane of a surface at the point
of tangency. Each surface has two normal vectors, which point in opposite directions. One is referred to as
the positive (front, outward) direction; the other is referred to as the negative (back, inward) direction.
When a surface is created, the default positive normal direction is based on the relative directions of the
curves defining the surface.
In the following graphics, the arrow shows the normal vector directions of a surface at the position of the
base of the arrow.

Notes:

¨ Like surfaces, solid faces have two normal vectors. The positive normal direction always points
outward, or away from the solid volume.

134
¨ Curves have one normal vector that is perpendicular to the tangent line of the curve at the point of
tangency.
Identifying the positive surface normal direction

There are several ways to identify the positive normal direction of a surface:

¨ The Show Back function, when active, applies a defined color to the back (negative) side of the
wireframe display of a surface, which distinguishes it from the front (positive) side. For information about
the Show Back function, see Showing and setting the back color for surface displays.

¨ You can verify the positive normal direction at any position on a surface. For more information, see
Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction and Analyzing a curve, surface, or solid face
at any position.

¨ A check normals option is built into functions where the normal direction affects the resulting
geometry so that you can check the normal direction without leaving the function. For more information,
see Checking surface normals.

Note: For solids, the positive normal direction always points away from the solid volume, and the negative
normal direction points into the solid volume.

How the surface normal direction affects your work in Mastercam

¨ When offsetting surfaces (Create, Surface, Offset), Mastercam offsets surfaces in the positive
normal direction when the offset distance is a positive value and in the negative normal direction when the
offset distance is a negative value.

¨ When creating curves at the intersection of a slice plane with surfaces and solids (Create, Curve,
Slice), you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. If you enter
a positive offset distance, Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal
direction. If you enter a negative offset distance, Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the
negative normal direction.

¨ When creating curves at the intersections of two sets of surfaces and solids (Create, Curve,
Intersect), you have the option to create the curves at an offset position of the surfaces and solids. If you
enter a positive offset distance, Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal
direction. If you enter a negative offset distance, Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the
negative normal direction.

¨ When projecting curves onto surfaces and solids (Create, Curve, Project), you have the option to
project the curves onto offset positions of the surfaces and solids. If you enter a positive offset distance,
Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the positive normal direction. If you enter a negative
offset distance, Mastercam calculates each offset surface and solid in the negative normal direction.

¨ When creating fillet surfaces between two sets of surfaces (Create, Surface, Fillet, Surf/Surf) or
between surfaces and a plane (Create, Surface, Fillet, Plane/surf), Mastercam creates fillet surfaces on the
sides of the surfaces that point in the positive normal direction unless you select the "Fillet Both Sides"
option, in which case Mastercam creates fillet on all sides of the surfaces, regardless of the normal
directions.

135
Example
In the following example, three sets of surfaces, each forming a cube, are offset by different values. The
positive normal direction for all of the surfaces points inward toward the center of the cube, and the
negative normal direction points outward from the center of the cube.

¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the left are offset by a positive value. Since the positive normal
direction points inward, each surface in this set is moved in the inward direction.

¨ The surfaces in the center graphic are offset by a zero distance. The surfaces in this set are not
moved in either direction.

¨ The surfaces in the graphic on the right are offset by a negative value. Since the negative normal
direction is outward, each surface in this set is moved in the outward direction.

Modifying surface normals

The Modify Normal menu gives you options for checking and changing surface normal directions. You can
access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Modify, Normal. The plus sign indicates the currently selected
menu option.

Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane

This function checks selected surfaces and reverses the normal direction on any surface whose outward, or
positive, normal direction points downward relative to the current Cplane.

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Normal, Set.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the
number of reversals.

3. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ For more information about surface normals, see About surface normals.

¨ You can perform the same function by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Set norms.

136
Reversing the surface normal direction

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Normal, Reverse.

2. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam reverses the surface normal direction.

3. Repeat step 2 to reverse the normal direction for additional surfaces.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Notes:

¨ For more information about surface normals, see About surface normals.

¨ To check the surface normal direction before reversing it, see Checking and optionally reversing the
surface normal direction.

Checking and optionally reversing the surface normal direction

1. Choose Main Menu, Modify, Normal, Dynamic.

2. Select a surface. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface.

3. Move the arrow along the surface to check the normal direction. The arrow points in the outward,
or positive, normal direction based on the cursor position.

Note: The size of the arrowhead changes to reflect the arrow’s position relative to your perspective in the
current graphics view. A larger arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points toward you; a smaller
arrowhead indicates that the normal vector points away from you.

4. When you can see the arrow clearly, click to set its position. Mastercam displays a direction menu.

5. Set the outward, or positive, surface normal direction by taking one of the following actions:

¨ Choose OK to accept the direction of the normal (the outward direction).

¨ Choose Flip to reverse the direction of the normal (the outward direction), then choose OK.

Note: To reverse the surface normal direction quickly without checking it first, see Reversing the surface
normal direction.

Analyzing entities
The Analyze menu gives you options for viewing data about entities and, in some cases, editing the data.
When the construction plane is set to 3D, Mastercam calculates data using absolute, or world, coordinates
relative to the system origin (0,0,0). In any other construction mode, the system calculates data using
coordinates relative to the current Cplane.
You can access the Analyze menu by choosing Analyze from the Main Menu.

137
Analyzing the coordinates of a point

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Point.

2. Enter a point in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates of
the point.

3. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional points.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing chains for coordinate data

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Contour.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

3. Set Contour type to 2D to analyze the boundary for 2D data or 3D to analyze the boundary for 3D
data.

Note: Choose 3D if your selection in step 2 contained spline entities.

4. Set Offset direction to Off and ignore all other options on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog
box.

Note: This step does not apply to Mastercam Design users since the only parameters available are those
pertaining to Contour type (set in step 3).

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

6. In the prompt area, type a comment for the report (optional), then press [Enter].

7. View the data, then close the window.

Note: Press [Alt+P] to print the data.

Analyzing chains for offset data

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Contour.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

3. Set Contour type to 2D.

4. Set Offset Distance to a value other than zero.

5. Set Offset direction to Left or Right.

6. Set the remaining parameters on the Analyze Contour Parameters dialog box, then choose OK.

7. In the prompt area, type a comment for the report (optional), then press [Enter].

138
8. View the data, then close the window.
Notes:

¨ To print the data, press [Alt+P] before closing the file in step 8.

¨ This function is not available in Mastercam Design.

¨ To analyze spline entities for offset data, you must first break them into line or arc segments. For
more information, see Breaking a spline into multiple line segments and Breaking 2D splines into arc and
line segments.

Analyzing entities of a defined type

You can limit the entities that are selectable by defining allowable entity types and/or attributes using the
Only menu. Doing so reduces your chance of selecting the wrong entity to analyze, which is useful when
you make your selection in complex geometry.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Only.

2. Use the Only menu to define your selection.

3. Select an entity. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box,
depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to analyze additional entities of the defined type.

Note: To redefine the type of entity to analyze, choose Only from the Analyze Entity menu.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing the distance and angle between two points

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Between pts.

2. Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates
of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points.

3. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing the distance and angle between two points

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Between pts.

2. Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates
of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points.
3. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

139
Analyzing the distance and angle between two points

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Between pts.

2. Enter two points in the graphics window. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the coordinates
of the points and the distance (2D and 3D) and angle between the points.

3. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional pairs of points.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing a curve, surface, or solid face at any position

Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select.

¨ For lines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates.

¨ For arcs and splines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of
curvature.

¨ For surfaces and solid faces, Mastercam displays the point coordinates, the normal coordinates,
and the minimum radius of curvature.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Dynamic.

2. Select a line, arc, spline, surface, or solid face. In the graphics window, Mastercam displays a
dynamic arrow on the selected entity.

3. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity.
In the prompt area, Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position.

4. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing the area/volume of entities

The Analyze Area/Volume menu gives you options for analyzing the 2D area of curves, the area defined by
surfaces and solid faces, and the volume defined by solid entities. You can access this menu by choosing
Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume.

Analyzing 2D curve area

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area.

2. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

140
Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the
outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed.

3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing surface and solid area

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Surface area.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

Note: For a solid, Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid.

3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing solid volumes

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props.

2. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically.

3. View the data for Volume, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing an entity by number

Mastercam assigns a unique number to each entity in the file, which provides a useful method for
referencing entities.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Number.

2. In the prompt area, enter the number of the entity to analyze. Mastercam displays data about the
entity in the prompt area or in a dialog box, depending on the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu.

3. To analyze additional entities by number, choose Number on the Analyze Entity menu and enter
the entity number in the prompt area.

141
4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Analyzing problems in chains

In addition to analyzing chains for overlapping entities, direction reversals, and short entities, you can
create geometry to mark problem areas, which helps you identify these areas in order to fix them.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Chain.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: To avoid missing overlapping or short entities, we recommend that you use the Window chaining
method.

3. Set display options for the types of problems you want to locate in the chains, then choose OK.

4. In the prompt area, Mastercam reports the number of each type of problem it finds and highlights
the problem areas in the graphics window. Press [Enter] to exit the function after reviewing the data.

Analyzing surfaces

The Analyze Surfaces menu gives you options for analyzing surfaces for information such as surface
curvature, bad surfaces, base surfaces, downward normal directions, backups, and self-intersections. You
can access this menu by choosing Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces.

Analyzing surface curvature

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Curvature.

2. Choose Rad limits.

3. In the prompt area, type a value for the minimum detectable radius, then press [Enter].

4. Type a value for the maximum detectable radius, then press [Enter].

5. Choose Surfaces.

6. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

Note: To analyze all visible surfaces, skip this step.

7. Set additional parameters on the Surface Curvature Analysis menu, as needed, then choose Do it to
view the curvature display.

Testing surface normals

The Test Normals function analyzes the normal vector of selected surfaces and reports the number of bad
surfaces whose normal vector reverses direction abruptly in one or more locations. These surfaces are
inherently unstable and may present problems during machining or may be unmachinable.

142
In addition to reporting the number of bad surfaces, this function gives you the option to change the color
of the surfaces, which is helpful for identifying them in the graphics window in order to fix or recreate
them. When changing the color of these surfaces, Mastercam uses the main system color, as indicated on
the Secondary menu.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Test norms.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of bad surfaces in the selection. Choose OK
to continue.

4. If prompted, choose Yes to change the color of bad surfaces to the current system color, which
makes them easier to identify in the graphics window, or No to maintain the current color of the surfaces.

Notes:

¨ Once you’ve identified bad surfaces, you can use the Analyze, Dynamic function to further analyze
the direction changes.

¨ To correct a bad surface, the portion of the surface containing the direction reversal must be
trimmed from the surface, if possible. Otherwise, the surface must be recreated.

Checking the display for visible base surfaces

This function lets you quickly check for and optionally blank visible base surfaces in the graphics window.
Note: A base surface is the untrimmed parent surface of a trimmed surface. When Mastercam trims a
surface, it creates the trimmed surface as a new surface and, in most cases, blanks the base surface, which
allows you to work with the new surface and does not crowd the graphics window with the associated base
surface.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Base surfs.

2. Choose All, Surfaces, Done.

3. Mastercam displays a window containing the number of visible base surfaces in the current file.
Choose OK to close the dialog box.

4. If prompted, choose Yes to blank the base surfaces or No to maintain the base surfaces as visible
surfaces.

Setting the surface normal direction upward relative to the current Cplane

The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface
machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model
function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp
ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file

143
into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from
the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more
information.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed
surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue.

5. When problem surfaces are detected, you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the
graphics window. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. Follow the
system prompts.

Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces:

¨ For backups, you can change the surface color to a color that you select.

¨ For self-intersections, you can change the surface color to a color that you select. You can also
create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. Mastercam creates this point
using the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu.

¨ For internal sharp ridges, you can create curves (lines, arcs, splines) along the sharp ridges. You
have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color, as defined on
the Secondary menu.

Checking surface models for self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges

The Check Model function analyzes surfaces for the following conditions, which pose problems in surface
machining and surface shading: self-intersections, backups, and internal sharp ridges. The Check Model
function is capable of fixing backups. However, it is not capable of fixing self-intersections or internal sharp
ridges. We recommend that you try to fix these conditions in the sending system before importing the file
into Mastercam. You can also try to fix the problems in Mastercam by trimming the self-intersection from
the trimmed surface and by splitting surfaces along the ridges. See the related topics below for more
information.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check model.

2. Select one or more surfaces, then choose Done.

3. In the prompt area, enter a self-intersection tolerance.

4. Mastercam analyzes the selected surfaces and displays a message stating the number of trimmed
surfaces and the number of surfaces containing each type of problem. Choose OK to continue.

144
5. When problem surfaces are detected, you have the option to have Mastercam mark them in the
graphics window. Doing so is helpful for identifying them in order to fix or recreate them. Follow the
system prompts.

Note: You have the following options for marking problem surfaces:

¨ For backups, you can change the surface color to a color that you select.

¨ For self-intersections, you can change the surface color to a color that you select. You can also
create a point entity at the location where the surface crosses over itself. Mastercam creates this point
using the main system color, as defined on the Secondary menu.

¨ For internal sharp ridges, you can create curves (lines, arcs, splines) along the sharp ridges. You
have the option to create the curves using a color that you select or the main system color, as defined on
the Secondary menu.

Checking solid models for errors

The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling
operations. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid
drawing. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying
entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. For example, with file formats in which healing during
import is supported, you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. Or you may use the
Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to
reconstruct new surfaces, which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function.

You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu, from the Analyze Solid dialog
box, or from the Solids Manager.
Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check Solid. The Check Solid dialog box displays.

2. Choose Perform Check.

3. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. If errors are detected, the Check Solid dialog box
redisplays and lists up to ten errors. If no errors are detected, a confirming message displays.

Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Only, Solids.

2. On the Analyze Entity menu, make sure Edit is set to Y.

3. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays.

4. Choose Check Solid. If errors are detected, the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten
errors. If no errors are detected, a confirming message displays.

145
Checking solids from the Solids Manager

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select a solid in the list.

3. Right-click on the selected solid, then choose Check Solid. If errors are detected, the Check Solid
dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. If no errors are detected, a confirming message displays.

Notes on managing error display


When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box:

¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window.

¨ Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window.

¨ Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale.

¨ If ten errors are listed, you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10)
and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors.

Analyzing entity and attribute data

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select an entity in the graphics window. Mastercam displays data about the entity in the prompt
area.

Note: If the Edit option on the Analyze Entity menu is set to Y, Mastercam displays the data in a dialog box.
Some of the data may be editable.

3. Repeat step 2 to analyze additional entities.

4. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating a point at the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area.

2. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the
outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed.

3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

146
4. Check Create Pt (Center of Gravity).

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point.

Creating a point at the moment of inertia about X,Y of a 2D curve boundary

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area.

2. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the
outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed.

3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

4. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia, about X,Y).

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point.

Creating a point at the moment of inertia about the center of gravity of a 2D curve boundary

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area.

2. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the
outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed.

3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

4. Check Create Pt (Moment of Inertia, about CG).

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point.

Analyzing 2D curve area

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, 2D area.

2. Select one or more closed, flat chains, then choose Done.

Note: Nested chains are allowed and are treated as holes whose area is subtracted from the area of the
outermost boundary. Disjoint chains are not allowed.

147
3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing surface and solid area

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Surface area.

2. Select one or more surfaces, solids, and/or solid faces, then choose Done.

Note: For a solid, Mastercam analyzes the area of all faces associated with the solid.

3. Enter a value for Chord height.

Note: This value sets the preciseness with which Mastercam analyzes the area defined by the selected
entities. A smaller value results in a more precise analysis and a more accurate calculation of area but with
the possibility of a longer processing time.

4. View the data, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing solid volumes

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props.

2. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically.

3. View the data for Volume, then choose OK to close the dialog box.

Analyzing a curve, surface, or solid face at any position

Mastercam displays different data depending on the type of entity you select.

¨ For lines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates.

¨ For arcs and splines, Mastercam displays the point and tangent coordinates and the radius of
curvature.

¨ For surfaces and solid faces, Mastercam displays the point coordinates, the normal coordinates,
and the minimum radius of curvature.

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Dynamic.

148
2. Select a line, arc, spline, surface, or solid face. In the graphics window, Mastercam displays a
dynamic arrow on the selected entity.

3. Use the mouse to move the base of the arrow to positions that you want to analyze on the entity.
In the prompt area, Mastercam displays data relative to the arrow position.

4. Press [Esc] to stop analyzing the selected entity.

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 to analyze additional entities.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Calculating a solid's mass

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props.

2. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically.

3. Enter a value for Density. Mastercam updates the value for Mass.

4. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Calculating a solid's moment of inertia about a selected axis line

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props.

2. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically.

3. Set Density, then choose Axis Line.

4. Select a line in the graphics window. In the field next to the Axis Line button, Mastercam displays
the solid’s moment of inertia relative to the selected line and density.

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

Creating a point at a solid's center of gravity

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Area/volume, Solid props.

2. If prompted, select a solid.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically.

3. Check Create Pt.

4. Choose OK to close the dialog box and create the point.

149
Editing the position of a point

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a point.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter XYZ coordinates or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the length of a line

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a line.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Type a value for Length, then press [Enter].

5. In the graphics window, select the line at the endpoint where you want the length change to be
calculated.

6. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the position of a line

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a line.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter XYZ coordinates for Endpoint 1 or Endpoint 2, or choose Move and enter a point in the
graphics window.

5. Repeat step 4 for the other endpoint, if necessary.

6. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

150
Editing the construction view of an arc

The construction view is the plane that the arc was constructed on (Cplane).

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select an arc.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter a View number, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the size of an arc

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select an arc.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter a Radius or Diameter value, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the sweep of an arc

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select an arc.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Change the sweep of the arc by taking one of the following actions:

¨ Enter an angle value for Sweep. Mastercam calculates the angle from the arc’s ending point.

¨ Enter a value for 3D Length. Mastercam calculates the length from the arc’s ending point.

¨ Enter an angle value for Startpoint and/or Endpoint or choose the corresponding Move button and
enter a point in the graphics window.

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

151
Editing the position of an arc

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select an arc.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter Center XYZ coordinates, or choose Move and enter a point in the graphics window.

5. Choose OK to exit the dialog box.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Reducing the amount of data stored for a NURBS spline

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a NURBS spline.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter a value for Allowable Error, then choose Reduce It.

5. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the number of control points removed from the spline.
Press [Enter] to continue.

6. If prompted, choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of control points or No to
maintain the original spline.

7. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Reducing the amount of data stored for a parametric spline

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a parametric spline.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter a value for Allowable Error, then choose Reduce It.

5. In the prompt area, Mastercam displays the number of node points removed from the spline. Press
[Enter] to continue.

6. At the prompt, choose Yes to save the spline with the reduced number of node points or No to
maintain the original spline.

152
7. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Modifying the position of a node point

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a parametric spline.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Choose Move Node.

Note: To maintain the tangency of the spline’s endpoints, choose Keep Tan for one or both endpoints
before choosing Move Node.

5. Select a node point on the spline.

6. Enter a point for the new node position, then press [Esc] to set the point.

7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to move additional node points, then press [Esc] to return to the dialog box.

8. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

9. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Note: If you select the start/endpoint of a closed spline, Mastercam displays the message shown below.
Choosing Yes tells Mastercam that you want to move the startpoint. Choosing No tells Mastercam that you
want to move the endpoint.

Flattening a 3D parametric spline

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a 3D parametric spline.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Choose Flatten.

5. Select a node point, then press [Esc].

Note: The selected node point sets the depth of the flattened spline.

6. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

153
Editing the offset distance of a surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select an offset surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter an Offset distance value, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the length of a draft surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a curve-generated draft surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter a 3D Length value, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the angle of a draft surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a curve-generated draft surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Enter an Angle value, then choose OK.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Editing the sweep of a revolved surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze.

2. Select a curve-generated revolved surface.

3. If Edit is set to N on the Analyze Entity menu, toggle it to Y.

4. Change the sweep of the surface by taking one of the following actions:

¨ Enter an angle value for Sweep. Mastercam calculates the angle from the surface’s end angle.

154
¨ Enter an angle value for Start Angle and/or End Angle.

5. Choose OK to close the dialog box.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the function.

Creating and editing drafting entities

The Drafting menu gives you options for creating and editing drafting entities: dimensions, labels, notes,
witness lines, leader lines, and hatch entities. Accessing the Drafting menu also puts you in SmartMode,
where you can select, create, and edit a variety of drafting entities. In addition to creating or editing
specific drafting entities, you can also set or edit drafting parameters that affect drafting entities you select
or create. You can access the Drafting menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

Drafting menu options


Regenerating associated drafting entities

When you create associated drafting entities, changing the size or position of geometry changes the status
of associated drafting entities from "clean" to "dirty." A status of "dirty" means that the position and/or
value of the associated entity no longer matches its geometry. Dirty drafting entities are highlighted in red.
Regenerating the drafting entity updates its position and/or value so that they once again match the
geometry. Only associated drafting entities can be regenerated. However, you can validate both associated
and non-associated drafting entities.

In particular, regenerating an associated dimension means that:

¨ When you resize an entity, the associated dimension’s value changes accordingly.

¨ When you move an entity, the associated dimension moves with it.

¨ If you modify (e.g., trim) an arc so that a dimensioned quadrant point is no longer valid, Mastercam
prompts you to convert the dimension to a radius/diameter format or to dissociate it.

You can access the Regenerate menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Regenerate. The
Regenerate menu gives you the following options for regenerating associated drafting entities:

¨ Automatic. Turning on this option tells Mastercam to regenerate associated drafting entities
automatically, whenever a change in geometry requires it.

¨ Select. Choosing this option lets you select associated drafting entities to regenerate at a particular
time. You can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e.g., during periods of intensive
editing)

¨ All. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all associated drafting entities at a particular time. You
can use this option when automatic regeneration is turned off (e.g., during periods of intensive editing).

¨ Validate. Choosing this option lets you regenerate all drafting entities, associated and non-
associated. It runs each entity through the regeneration process, recreating or reformatting the entity to
Mastercam standards.

155
Creating drafting dimensions

Mastercam provides two menus for creating drafting dimensions: the Drafting menu (SmartMode) and the
Dimension menu.

¨ Drafting menu (SmartMode). The Drafting menu, when displayed, puts you into SmartMode, an
integrated drafting environment where you can create all dimensions except baseline, chained, or
ordinate. You can also create other entities such as notes, labels, leaders, and hatch entities from the
Drafting menu. To access the Drafting menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

When to use. Because of its flexibility in allowing you to create or edit many different kinds of drafting
entities, you will usually find it more convenient and efficient (fewer mouse clicks) to create dimensions
(except baseline, chained, or ordinate) in SmartMode than from the Dimension menu—especially when
you are creating or editing different types of dimensions in succession. You must use SmartMode to create
perpendicular dimensions, which cannot be created from the Dimension menu.

¨ Dimension menu. The Dimension menu gives you options for creating specific types of dimensions.
You can use the Dimension menu to create all dimensions except perpendicular. To access the Dimension
menu, choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension. Then choose the option (Horizontal, Vertical, etc.)
that corresponds to the dimension you want to create.

When to use. If you are creating multiple instances of a particular dimension type (horizontal, vertical,
etc.), you may find it more efficient to choose that option from the Dimension menu than to create the
dimension in SmartMode. You must use the Dimension menu to create baseline, chained, and ordinate
dimensions, as these dimensions cannot be created in SmartMode (from the Drafting menu).

Note: You cannot select, reposition, or edit existing dimensions from the Dimension menu. Instead, display
the Drafting menu, then use SmartMode and the Quick Edit options to select, reposition, and edit
dimensions you wish to change.

Creating dimensions in SmartMode (Drafting menu)

Selecting drafting entities in SmartMode

SmartMode is an integrated drafting environment, in which you can create different dimensions as well as
select and edit existing dimensions and drafting entities. In this environment, the geometric or drafting
entities you select activate the appropriate drafting function, allowing you to create or edit drafting
entities, as summarized in the following table and the notes below.

Notes:

¨ Selecting an existing drafting entity in SmartMode lets you edit that drafting entity, even if the
entity was not created in SmartMode (e.g., a baseline, chained, or ordinate dimension, a note, or a label).

¨ To activate the point dimension function in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must
be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. You can, however,
select and edit an existing point dimension in SmartMode.

156
Creating dimensions in SmartMode: Overview

As a dynamic environment for creating drafting dimensions, SmartMode allows you to create point, linear
(horizontal, vertical, perpendicular, or tangent), angular, and circular, dimensions depending on the points
or entities you select and the sequence in which you select them. The following table summarizes the
selection sequences you can use to create dimensions in SmartMode.

Note: To create point dimensions in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must be turned on
(checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box.

157
Creating linear dimensions in SmartMode

In SmartMode, you can create horizontal, vertical, or parallel linear dimensions for selected entities in the
graphics window.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text in different directions to display available linear dimension types:
horizontal, vertical, or parallel. (If you are dragging a dimension associated with a horizontal or vertical line,
its type is locked by default.)

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.

4. While the desired dimension type is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose
Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type.

158
5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the
mouse button to set its position.

Note: You can also create horizontal, vertical, and parallel dimensions from the Dimension menu.

Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu)

Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal
dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Horizontal.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function.

Notes:

¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type
(horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text.

¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode.

Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu)

Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Vertical.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function.

159
Notes:

¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type
(horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text.

¨ You can also create and edit vertical dimensions in SmartMode.

Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu)

Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Parallel.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function.

Creating perpendicular dimensions in SmartMode

Perpendicular dimensions measure the perpendicular distance between any of the following:

¨ A point and a line

¨ Two points and a parallel line

¨ Two parallel lines

In SmartMode, you can create perpendicular linear dimensions for selected entities in the graphics
window.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Select either:

¨ One point and a line

¨ Two points and a parallel line

¨ Two parallel lines

160
Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available perpendicular dimensions for the
selected points and/or lines.

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.

4. While the desired perpendicular dimension is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or
choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the current dimension.

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the
mouse button to save the position.

Creating angular dimensions in SmartMode

In SmartMode, you can create angular dimensions for selected entities. For an example and detailed
information about angular dimensions, see Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu).

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Select either:

* Two non-parallel lines

* Three points (first point selected become the vertex)

* A line and two points. (To select the two points you must first choose the Quick Edit Point mode
option while dragging the linear dimension associated with the first line selected.)

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension into the quadrant, relative to the selected lines or points, whose angular
dimension you wish to display.

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.

4. While the dimension is in the desired quadrant, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose
Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension into the current quadrant.

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the
mouse button to save the position.

Note: To drag the dimension text outside of its quadrant, Auto Center must be turned off while the
dimension is locked. You can add connecting tails out-of quadrant text by checking the Add tail to angular
leaders parameter in the Witness/Leaders/Arrows tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box.

161
Creating circular dimensions in SmartMode

In SmartMode, you can create circular dimensions for selected entities. For an example and detailed
information about circular dimensions, see Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu).

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Select either:

¨ A circle (or two points on the same circle)

¨ An arc (or two points on the same arc)

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types: circular, horizontal,
or vertical.

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.

4. To change the measured dimension between diameter and radius, choose the Quick Edit (R)ad or
(D)ia options.

Note: The default dimension depends on the selected object, as follows:

¨ If you selected a circle, a diameter dimension is displayed.

¨ If you selected an arc (<360 degrees), a radius dimension is displayed.

¨ If you selected an existing circular dimension, the dimension’s last specified style is displayed.

5. While the desired dimension type (circular, horizontal, or vertical) is displayed, press and hold the
left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type.

6. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the
mouse button to save the position.

Creating tangent dimensions in SmartMode

In SmartMode, you can create tangent dimensions for selected entities. For an example and detailed
information about tangent dimensions, see Tangent dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Select either:

¨ A point and an arc/circle

¨ A line and an arc/circle

162
¨ Two arc/circles

3. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available dimension types (vertical, horizontal)
and tangent points.

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.

4. While the desired tangent dimension is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose
Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension’s current type.

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then release (or click) the
mouse button to save the position.

Creating point dimensions in SmartMode

In SmartMode, you can create point dimensions for selected entities. For an example and detailed
information about point dimensions, see Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu).
Note: To enable the point dimension function in SmartMode, the Display in SmartMode parameter must
be turned on (checked) in the Dimension Text tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Enter a point

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions, as needed.

Creating dimensions from the Dimension menu

Creating horizontal dimensions (Dimension menu)

Horizontal dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the horizontal distance between two points. The
following example shows a horizontal dimension:

Choosing the Horizontal option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal
dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Horizontal.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

163
Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional horizontal dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the Horizontal dimension function.

Notes:

¨ Choosing the Quick Edit un(L)ock option, when available, allows the dimension to change type
(horizontal, vertical, parallel), as you drag the dimension text.

¨ You can also create and edit horizontal dimensions in SmartMode.

Creating vertical dimensions (Dimension menu)

Vertical dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the vertical distance between two points. The
following example shows a vertical dimension:

Choosing the Vertical option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Vertical.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional vertical dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the Vertical dimension function.

Creating parallel dimensions (Dimension menu)

Parallel dimensions are linear dimensions that measure the actual distance between two points and are
parallel to the axis that runs between the two points. The following example shows a parallel dimension:

Choosing the Parallel option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Parallel.

2. Enter two points or select a line.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

164
Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional parallel dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the Parallel dimension function.

Creating baseline dimensions

Baseline dimensions are linear dimensions that reference an existing linear dimension, which serves as a
"base" line, or zero distance. If the original (base) dimension is associated to a geometric entity, the linked
baseline dimensions inherit that associativity. Depending on your drafting settings (Settings tab in the
Drafting Globals dialog box), you can set baseline dimensions at pre-determined increments or in a position
you choose.
When you create a series of baseline dimensions, where you enter the endpoint for the first baseline
dimension determines which witness line of the base dimension serves as the reference entity for all
subsequent baseline dimensions in the series. If you enter a point to the right of the original dimension’s
midpoint, Mastercam uses the witness line to the left as the reference entity, and vice-versa.

Choosing the Baseline option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more series of baseline
dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Baseline.

2. Select a linear dimension to be the base. The Point Entry menu displays.

3. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first baseline dimension that you want to create.

4. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.
You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

Note: You can drag the dimension text and use the Quick Edit options only if the Baseline Increments:
Automatic parameter is not checked in the Settings tab of the Drafting Globals dialog box. If Baseline
Increments: Automatic is checked, the dimension is set at the fixed baseline increment as soon as you
enter the endpoint (step 3).

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create additional baseline dimensions using the same linear dimension.

6. Press [Esc] to complete the current baseline dimension series.

7. If desired, repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of baseline dimensions using a different linear
dimension.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the baseline dimension function.

165
Creating chained dimensions

Chained dimensions are linear dimensions that build on one another, beginning with the selection of an
existing linear dimension. This dimension is used as a "base," or zero distance for the first chained
dimension. Each chained dimension, in turn, becomes the base for the next dimension in the chain.
Chained dimensions are not associated with a geometric entity, even if the original base dimension
selected for the chain is associated.
When you create each new dimension in a chain, Mastercam calculates the midpoint of the previously
entered dimension. Where you enter the endpoint for the new dimension determines which witness line of
the previous dimension becomes the new dimension’s reference entity. If you enter a point to the right of
the previous dimension’s midpoint, Mastercam uses the previous dimension’s right witness line as the first
witness line of the new dimension, and vice versa.

Choosing the Chained option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more sets of chained
dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Chained.

2. Select a linear dimension. The Point Entry menu displays.

3. Enter a point for the second endpoint of the first chained dimension that you want to create.

4. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to chain each new dimension to the previous one.

6. Press [Esc] to complete the current chain.

7. Repeat steps 2–6 to create another set of chained dimensions using a different linear dimension.

8. Press [Esc] to exit the chained dimension function.

Creating circular dimensions (Dimension menu)

Circular dimensions measure the diameter or the radius of arcs and circles. You can position the dimension
text inside or outside the arc, depending on the position to which you drag the dimension. The format of a
circular dimension can be linear (horizontal or vertical) or radius/diameter (rotating).
While you drag a circular dimension, the dimension type and/or format changes (unless it is locked) as
follows:

¨ To the right and left of the arc or circle, a vertical dimension is drawn.

¨ Above and below the arc or circle, a horizontal dimension is drawn.

¨ Inside the arc or circle or outside any of the four 45-degree "quadrants," a radius/diameter
(rotating) dimension is drawn.

Choosing the Circular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more circular dimensions.

166
1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Circular.

2. Select an arc or a circle. Mastercam displays the dimension, as follows:

¨ If you selected a circle, a diameter dimension is displayed.

¨ If you selected an arc (<360 degrees), a radius dimension is displayed.

3. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available types and formats: circular,
horizontal, or vertical.

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.
Choosing the Quick Edit (R)ad or (D)ia options changes the measured dimension between diameter and
radius.

4. While the desired dimension type or format (radius/diameter, horizontal, or vertical) is displayed,
press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick Edit (L)ock option) to lock the dimension type.

5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then Release (or click) the
mouse button to set its position.

6. Repeat steps 2–5 to create additional circular dimensions, as needed.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the circular dimension function.

Creating angular dimensions (Dimension menu)

Angular dimensions measure the angle formed by: two non-parallel lines, two points and a line, three
points, or a line and a horizon (a virtual line defined by specifying an angle relative to the X axis of the
Cplane). Angular dimensions from three points can be created only in SmartMode. The following example
shows an angular dimension:

Choosing the Angular option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more angular dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Angular.

2. Do either of the following:

¨ Select two non-parallel lines.

¨ Select a line, then choose Relative from the Angular dimension menu to display the Point Entry
menu. Enter a point, specify an angle (0 to 180 degrees) in the prompt area, and press [Enter].

3. Drag the dimension in different directions to display available quadrants.

Note: While dragging the dimension text, you can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension.

4. While the desired quadrant is displayed, press and hold the left mouse button (or choose Quick
Edit (L)ock option) to lock the quadrant.

167
5. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then Release (or click) the
mouse button to set its position.

6. Repeat steps 2 – 5 to create additional angular dimensions, as needed.

7. Press [Esc] to exit the angular dimension function.

Creating tangent dimensions (Dimension menu)

Choosing the Tangent option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more tangent dimensions.
For examples and information about creating and using tangent dimensions, see Tangent dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Tangent.

2. Select a point, line, or arc/circle.

3. Do either of the following:

¨ If you selected a point or a line in step 2, select an arc/circle.

¨ If you selected an arc/circle in step 2, select a point, line, or another arc/circle.

4. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

5. Repeat steps 2-4 to create additional tangent dimensions, as needed.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the tangent dimension function.

Creating ordinate dimensions

Ordinate dimensions are non-linear dimensions that measure distance from a common base dimension, or
zero distance. Ordinate dimensions are composed of a base (also referred to as a "parent") dimension and
one or more secondary (also referred to as "child") dimensions. While non-linear in format, ordinate
dimensions can display tolerances.
The base dimension is an initial ordinate dimension that you create or select and whose position
Mastercam designates as 0.0000. For each child dimension, Mastercam calculates its distance from the
base dimension to determine its text value. Base or child ordinate dimensions may be associated with
geometry independently of each other. However, if a change in geometry causes an associated base
ordinate dimension to become dirty, all children of that dimension become dirty as well.

The Ordinate Dimension menu gives you options for creating ordinate dimensions. You can access the
Ordinate Dimension menu by choosing Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate.

Creating horizontal ordinate dimensions

Horizontal ordinate dimensions measure the horizontal distance, from a common base point, along the X
axis of the current Cplane. The following example shows a horizontal ordinate dimension.

168
Choosing the Horizontal option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more horizontal
ordinate dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate, Horizontal. The Point Entry menu
displays.

2. Enter a point. For the initial ordinate dimension, this base point is 0.0000.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the horizontal ordinate dimension function.

Creating vertical ordinate dimensions

Choosing the Vertical option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more vertical
ordinate dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate, Vertical. The Point Entry menu displays.

2. Enter a point. For the initial ordinate dimension, this base point is 0.0000.

169
3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional ordinate (child) dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the vertical ordinate dimension function.

Creating parallel ordinate dimensions

Choosing the Parallel option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you create one or more parallel
ordinate dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate, Parallel. The Point Entry menu displays.

2. Enter two points: the first defines the initial ordinate dimension (0.0000), the second defines the
dimension orientation.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. For each additional ordinate (child) dimension you wish to create, enter a point, then drag/edit and
position the dimension text, as described in step 3.

5. Press [Esc] to exit the parallel ordinate dimension function.

Adding ordinate dimensions to an existing base dimension

Choosing the Existing option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you add secondary, or child, ordinate
dimensions to an existing ordinate base dimension that you select and which Mastercam designates as
0.0000.

170
1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate, Existing.

2. Select an existing base ordinate dimension (0.0000).

3. Enter a point for an additional ordinate dimension.

4. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

5. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to create additional ordinate dimensions, as needed.

6. Press [Esc] to exit the existing ordinate dimension function.

Creating multiple ordinate dimensions automatically

Choosing the Window option from the Ordinate Dimension menu opens a dialog box that lets you create
multiple sets of ordinate dimensions from a common origin (base point) based on parameters that you set
for entities that you select.
Once you set a base point and other dimension parameters, Mastercam automatically creates a base
(parent) dimension and all possible child dimensions relative to this point based on the selected
parameters and entities. You have the option to create horizontal and/or vertical ordinate dimensions. You
can create dimensions at the center points of arcs, the endpoints of arcs, and/or the endpoints of lines,
splines, and surface curves.

Using this method can save time by letting you create many ordinate dimensions at once while eliminating
the need to enter individual points. Ordinate dimensions created using this method are not associated with
any geometry; however, child dimensions are associated with the base.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate, Window. The Ordinate Dimension:
Automatic dialog box opens.

2. Type coordinates for the base point (0.0000) in the X and Y text boxes, or choose Select to enter a
base point by clicking in the graphics window. Entry is required.

3. Check one or both of the following (you must check at least one):

¨ Horizontal to create horizontal ordinate dimensions

¨ Vertical to create vertical ordinate dimensions

4. Under Points, check one or more options (you must check at least one) to specify what kinds of
points to dimension.

5. Under Options, check or clear parameters, as desired, to achieve desired dimension format.

6. Choose OK.

7. Select entities to dimension from the Entity Selection menu, then choose Done.

171
Aligning ordinate dimensions

Choosing the Align option from the Ordinate Dimension menu lets you select, reposition, and align the text
of all related ordinate dimensions along a common axis. Aligning ordinate dimensions can improve
neatness in a drawing while highlighting their relatedness. However, if aligning the ordinate dimensions
interferes with other entities in the drawing, you can use the Quick Edit (A)lign option to move a selected
ordinate dimension independently from the others.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Ordinate, Align.

2. Select and drag an existing ordinate dimension (base or child). The text of all related ordinate
elements snaps into alignment and moves together.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position
and exit the Align function.

Creating point dimensions (Dimension menu)

Point dimensions identify the coordinates for any given position in the graphics window. The following
example shows a point dimension:

Choosing the Point option from the Dimension menu lets you create one or more point dimensions.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Dimension, Point.

2. Enter a point.

Note: Before entering a point, you can choose the Quick Edit (P)oint option to display the Point Entry menu
and access additional point entry options.

3. Drag the dimension text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position.

Note: You can use the Quick Edit options to edit the dimension before setting its position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional point dimensions, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] to exist the point dimension function.

Creating a drafting note

You can create a drafting note by choosing the Note option from the Drafting menu.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Note. The Note dialog box opens.

172
2. Enter note text in one or more of the following ways:

¨ Key In. Type the text directly into the Note text box. If desired, press [Enter] to create line or
paragraph breaks.

¨ File. Click Load File to open the Specify File Name to Read dialog box. Locate and select a file
containing the text (ASCII, unformatted) you wish enter, then click Open.

¨ Symbol. Click Add Symbol to open the Select Symbol dialog box, then click the symbol you wish to
enter.

3. Select either of the following:

¨ Single Note to create one instance of the note.

¨ Multiple Notes to create multiple copies of the same note.

Note: You can choose Properties to edit the note’s text properties using the Drafting Globals dialog box.

4. Choose OK. The Note dialog box closes.

5. Drag the note text to a desired position in the graphics window, then click to set its position. If you
selected Multiple Notes in step 3, drag and position each additional note copy, then press [Esc] to exit the
Note function.

Creating freestanding witness lines

Witness lines are simple, straight drafting lines (no arrowheads) used to indicate boundaries or connect
entities. In dimensions, witness lines are paired parallel lines that indicate the end points of a dimension.
Unless you turn off the display of witness lines (Drafting Globals dialog box), Mastercam creates witness
lines automatically when you create dimensions.
The following example shows witness lines in a dimension.

You can also create freestanding witness lines by choosing Witness from the Drafting menu. You can create
freestanding witness lines anywhere in the graphics window. Freestanding witness lines can be associated
with the geometry selected during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity, such as
midpoints, endpoints, center points, quadrant points, etc.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Witness. The Point Entry menu displays.

173
2. Enter two points. Mastercam creates the witness line between them.

3. Repeat step 2 to create additional witness lines, as needed.

Creating freestanding leader lines

Leader lines are drafting lines with single arrowheads that function as pointers. In Mastercam, leader lines
most often point from a dimension’s text to its witness lines. Unless you turn off the display of leader lines
in the Drafting Globals dialog box, Mastercam creates leader lines automatically when you create
dimensions. Leader lines are also used with note text to create labels.
The following example shows a leader line in a dimension:

You can also create freestanding leader lines by choosing the Leader option from the Drafting menu. You
can use this option to create single or segmented leader lines. You can create freestanding leader lines
anywhere in the graphics window. Freestanding leader lines can be associated with the geometry selected
during their creation or by entering points relative to an entity, such as midpoints, endpoints, center
points, quadrant points, etc.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Leader. The Point Entry menu displays.

2. Beginning with the arrowhead position, enter two points to create a single leader line; enter
additional points to create a segmented leader line.

3. Press [Esc]. Mastercam creates a leader line connecting all entered points.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to create additional single or segmented leaders, as needed.

5. Press [Esc] when done.

Editing global parameters for selected drafting entities

Choosing the Multi Edit option on the Drafting menu lets you use the Drafting Globals dialog box to edit
parameters for one or more drafting entities that you select.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Multi edit. The Entity Selection menu displays.

2. Select one or more entities that you want to edit, then choose Done. The Drafting Globals dialog
box opens.

3. To get settings from a file, from an entity, or from the system defaults, select the Settings tab and
choose one of the following options:

¨ Get globals from disk file

¨ Get globals from entity

¨ Get default globals

174
4. To modify individual settings, select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters, as follows
(only tabs and parameters relevant to selected entities will be available):

¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format, display, and
tolerances.

¨ Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension
text.

¨ Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text.

¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of
leader lines, witness lines, and arrowheads associated with dimensions, notes, and labels.

¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity,
regeneration, display conditions, and baseline increments.

Note: For additional dialog box help, choose the Help button on each tab. For additional help with
individual parameter settings, Click the ? in the upper-right corner, then click a parameter.

5. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and apply settings to selected entities.

Notes:

¨ You cannot select or edit hatch entities.

¨ To keep settings for future use, you can save the new drafting settings to a file before closing the
Drafting Globals dialog box.

¨ In addition to editing multiple drafting entities, as described above, you can use the Drafting
Globals dialog box to:

¨ Set current drafting parameters that apply to all new entities you may create during the drawing
session (Drafting Globals option).

¨ Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option).

¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen
Configure option)

Editing drafting text

Turning on the Drafting menu’s Edit text function allows you to edit the text of drafting dimensions, notes,
and labels without changing the entity’s position in the graphics window.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting.

2. Choose Edit text to turn on the edit text function (there should be a ‘Y’ following the option to
show that it is turned on).

Note: Choosing Edit text again turns off the edit text function (Y changes to N).

175
3. Select a drafting dimension, note, or label to open the Edit Dimension Text dialog box (if a
dimension is selected) or the Note dialog box (if a note or label is selected).

4. Type text changes in the appropriate text box, then choose OK to close the dialog box and apply
changes to the selected entity.

Note: In the Note dialog box, you can also load text from a file (choose Load File). In either dialog box, you
can insert special characters (choose Add Symbol or Ø).

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to edit the text of additional drafting entities.

Note: You can also edit drafting text while dragging an entity by choosing the Quick Edit (T)ext option.

Creating hatch entities

Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you create hatch entities by specifying a hatch
pattern, spacing, and rotation angle for closed curve boundaries that you select.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Hatch. The Hatch dialog box opens.

2. Select a hatch pattern from the Pattern list.

Note: If you want to define, edit, or delete a user-defined cross-hatch pattern, choose User defined hatch
patterns. For more information see Related Topics.

3. If necessary, change the spacing and/or angle settings, as follows:

¨ In the Spacing box, type a different value for spacing between hatch lines.

¨ In the Angle box, type a different value for the angle of the hatch lines.

4. Choose OK. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window.

5. Select one or more closed chains, then choose Done. Mastercam fills each closed boundary with
the hatch pattern with the exception of nested boundaries, which form holes in the pattern.

Notes:

¨ Mastercam creates one hatch entity, regardless of the number of boundaries that you select.

¨ You cannot edit a hatch entity in the graphics window. To change a hatch entity, first delete the
existing hatch entity. Then create a new hatch entity, using the above procedure.

Defining a hatch pattern

Choosing User defined hatch patterns in the Hatch dialog box opens the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog
box, where you can create up to eight user-defined hatch patterns (in addition to the eight standard hatch

176
patterns supplied by Mastercam). For each user-defined pattern, you can specify up to 16 hatch lines and
16 crosshatch lines.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Hatch. The Hatch dialog box opens.

2. Choose User defined hatch patterns. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first
user-defined hatch number is selected.

3. Choose New Hatch to select the next available number of a new pattern you wish to add.

Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box.

4. Specify new Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows:

¨ Choose New Line, then choose either Blank Line, Solid Line, or Broken Line.

¨ Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to add.

5. Choose OK to save your work and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box.

Editing a hatch pattern

Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you edit the hatch and crosshatch lines of an existing
user-defined hatch pattern. (You cannot edit the standard hatch patterns supplied by Mastercam.)

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Hatch. The Hatch dialog box opens.

2. Choose User defined hatch patterns. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first
user-defined Hatch Number is selected.

Shortcut: In the Pattern list, double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. The User Defined Hatch
Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected as the Hatch Number. You can then proceed to
step 4.

3. In the Hatch Number drop-down list, select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to
edit.

Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box.

4. Modify Hatch Lines and Cross Hatch Lines as follows:

¨ Select a number from the Line # list, then choose either Blank Line, Solid Line, or Broken Line.

¨ Repeat the previous step for each line you wish to modify.

5. Choose OK to save your changes and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box.

177
Deleting a hatch pattern

Choosing the Hatch option on the Drafting menu lets you delete an existing user-defined hatch pattern.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Hatch. The Hatch dialog box opens.

2. Choose User defined hatch patterns. The User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box opens and the first
user-defined hatch number is selected.

Shortcut: In the Pattern list, double-click the user-defined pattern you wish to edit. The User Defined Hatch
Pattern dialog box opens with that pattern already selected. You can then proceed to step 4.

3. In the Hatch Number drop-down list, select the number of the user-defined pattern you wish to
delete.

Note: The Hatch Number corresponds to the User Defined # in the Hatch dialog box.

4. Choose Delete Hatch to the remove the selected user-defined pattern. The deleted hatch number
reverts to Undefined.

5. Choose OK to save the change and close the User Defined Hatch Pattern dialog box.

Setting global drafting parameters for the current drawing session

Choosing the Globals option on the Drafting menu opens the Drafting Globals dialog box and lets you set
drafting parameters and preferences that apply to all drafting entities you subsequently create during the
current drawing session. The settings you enter override, for the remainder of the current drafting session,
initial drafting configuration settings loaded when you started Mastercam or initialized the current drawing
session. Setting these parameters before creating entities can save you time later on by minimizing the
need to edit or recreate entities with the properties you want.

1. Choose Main Menu, Create, Drafting, Globals. The Drafting Globals dialog box opens.

2. To get settings from a file, from an entity, or from the system defaults, select the Settings tab and
choose one of the following options:

¨ Get globals from disk file

¨ Get globals from entity

¨ Get default globals

3. To modify individual settings, select the appropriate tab and set desired parameters, as follows:

¨ Select the Dimension Attributes tab to set parameters affecting dimension format, display, and
tolerances.

¨ Select the Dimension Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of dimension
text.

178
¨ Select the Note Text tab to set parameters affecting the size and appearance of note and label text.

¨ Select the Leaders/Witness/Arrows tab to set parameters affecting the display and appearance of
leader lines, witness lines, and arrowheads associated with dimensions, notes, and labels.

¨ Select the Settings tab to set miscellaneous drafting parameters affecting associativity,
regeneration, display conditions, and baseline increments.

Note: For additional help with individual parameter settings, click the ? in the upper-right corner, then click
a parameter.

4. Choose OK to close the Drafting Globals dialog box and use the new settings for creating drafting
entities during the current drawing session.

Notes:

¨ To keep settings for future use, you can save the current drafting settings to a file before closing
the Drafting Globals dialog box.

¨ In addition to setting drafting parameters for the current drawing session, as described above, you
can use the Drafting Globals dialog box to:

¨ Edit multiple drafting entities (Drafting Multi edit option).

¨ Edit a single drafting entity (Quick Edit (G)lobals option).

¨ Set initial drafting parameters and save them to the Mastercam configuration file (Screen
Configure option)

179
Master cam Solids

The Solids menu gives you options for performing solid operations to create and modify solid models and
for managing solid operations. A solid is a closed, three-dimensional geometric entity that occupies a
region of space and that consists of one or more faces, which define the closed boundary of the solid. You
can create multiple solids in a file. Mastercam does not support creation of disjoint bodies. However, when
a Trim or Boolean (Remove, Common) operation would result in disjoint bodies, Mastercam creates one or
more bricks (solids with no operation history) to represent the disjoint pieces.

To access the Solids menu, choose Solids from the Main Menu.

About solid modeling

Solid modeling refers to the process of creating solids. Unlike wireframe models, which are a collection of
curves, and surface models, which are a collection of surfaces, a solid model is a single entity, regardless of
its complexity. You work with a solid model as a whole, like molding a piece of clay, rather than building a
model from a series of unrelated entities. For example, you can add fillets to a solid, then hollow it out, and
even combine it with another solid—it still remains one entity.

Because a solid is a closed, organized model, Mastercam is able to keep track of the inside and outside of
the model for you. This characteristic makes solid modeling easy because the system handles the
complexities of the model behind the scenes. You never have to determine the surfaces that you want to
keep or trim when you perform operations on the solid. The system automatically performs these actions
for you, always maintaining each solid as a single entity.

Creating a solid model in Mastercam

Through a few easy steps, you can create and machine a solid model in Mastercam. The steps outlined
below give you an overview of the process of solid modeling in Mastercam. You can then adapt these steps
to create your own solid model. See the related topics for more information.
Step 1: Create a base operation.
A solid is defined by one or more operations. The first operation, called the base operation, creates the
solid. A base operation is always listed as the first operation under the solid in the Solids Manager. It
cannot be moved in or deleted from the operation list. You can create a base operation by taking one of
the following actions:

¨ Define a solid by extruding, revolving, sweeping, or lofting chains of curves.

¨ Define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes, such as a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus.

¨ Import a solid from a parasolid file.

Note: For additional information on these functions, see Solids menu options and Reading a Parasolid file.
Step 2: Create additional operations.
Once the base operation has been created, you can perform subsequent operations to modify the solid.
You can perform the following functions to modify a solid:

¨ Remove material by making one or more cuts on a target solid

¨ Add material by creating one or more bosses on a target solid

180
¨ Smooth solid edges by adding a radius (fillet)

¨ Bevel (chamfer) solid edges

¨ Hollow out (shell) solids and optionally cut entry holes

¨ Perform Boolean functions: add solids together, remove solids from one another, find common
solid volumes.

¨ Draft solid faces

¨ Trim solids to a plane or surface

Note: For additional information on these functions, see Solids menu options.
Step 3: Manage solid operations.
The Solids Manager lists the operations that were performed to define each solid in the current file. You
can check the location of an operation in the model, edit an operation’s components (geometry and
parameters), check a solid model at various points in its development, and regenerate all or individual
solids.
Note: For additional information on the Solids Manager, see Managing solid operations.

Step 4: Machine the solid.


You can use Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Lathe to create toolpaths directly on solid geometry. For more
information, see Mill toolpaths and Lathe toolpaths.

Solid associativity

Solid associativity is the dependent relationship between a solid and the operations that define it. When
you perform a solid operation such as extrude, fillet, draft face, etc., Mastercam associates it with the solid
that it creates or modifies. This association can be broken only by deleting the operation.
Because an operation is associated with the solid that it creates or modifies, you cannot copy operations or
move them to a different solid. For example, when rechaining a fillet operation, all of the new edges that
you select must be on the same solid where the operation was originally defined. To fillet edges on a
different solid, you would need to create a new fillet operation on that solid.

Associativity eliminates the need to recreate a solid each time you modify it. After editing an operation’s
components (geometry and parameters), you can regenerate the solid to incorporate your changes. The
following terms describe a solid operation and the current state of its associativity:

¨ Clean: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and geometry match the associated
solid. This condition applies to all newly created operations and to operations that have been successfully
regenerated. For a solid to be stable and current, its operations should be clean.

¨ Dirty: Describes an operation whose defining parameters and/or geometry have changed and no
longer match the associated solid. Mastercam marks each dirty operation and its associated solid with a
red X in the Solids Manager. You can correct dirty operations by regenerating them.

¨ Invalid: Describes an operation that fails due to a problem in its geometry and/or parameters,
which prevents it from being regenerated. Deleting geometry that defines an operation is a common cause
of invalid operations. Mastercam marks each invalid operation and its associated solid with a red question

181
mark (?) in the Solids Manager. You can try to correct an invalid operation by making changes to the
operation’s parameters and/or geometry, then regenerating the operation.

Associativity can also exist between some solid operations. For example, if a cut operation results in a new
face and you fillet that face, the fillet operation is dependent on the cut operation. If you delete the cut
operation, Mastercam deletes the fillet operation as well because the edge that defined the fillet operation
no longer exists. In the Solids Manager, a defining operation always precedes a dependent operation in the
operation list.
Associativity does not exist between individual solids in a Mastercam file unless those solids are used in
Boolean combinations. When you perform a Boolean operation, Mastercam associates the tool body with
the target body.

Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves

The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts
on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the
shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction, distance, and other parameters that
further define the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains
that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine operations, and what construction
method you use.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Extrude.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat), but all chains do not have to be in the same plane.

3. Set the extrusion direction. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves
to reflect its current extrusion direction.

Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves.

4. Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

5. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

6. Set additional parameters as needed, then choose OK. The system performs the extrude operation
or prompts you to:

¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point.

182
¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction
method.

¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one
visible solid in the file.

¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Setting the extrusion direction

The extrusion direction is the direction that the system drives the shape of the selected chains of curves to
form an extruded solid, cut, or boss. The default extrusion direction is normal to each chain of curves that
you select to extrude. The sense of the normal vector is determined by the chaining direction and the right-
hand rule. It is set so that the chain is counter-clockwise about the normal vector.

Note: When using the thin-wall construction method, you must use the normal direction, although you can
reverse the sense of the normal vector.

The Extrusion Direction menu, which displays after you select the chains of curves to extrude, gives you
options for changing the extrusion direction. You can also access this menu from the Extrude Chain dialog
box if you need to edit the extrusion direction at a later time. When this menu displays, a direction arrow
also displays on each selected chain of curves to show the current extrusion direction.

Normal : Sets the extrusion direction normal to each selected chain of curves based on the chaining
direction and the right-hand rule.

Normal One : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains normal to one chain that you select. This
function tells Mastercam to extrude all selected chains in the same plane.

ConstZ : Sets the extrusion direction according to the positive Z axis of the current construction plane.

Line : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of a line that you select in
the graphics window. The endpoint closest to where you select the line functions as the endpoint of the

183
direction vector, and the extrusion direction moves away from this point along the line. The line is not
associative; therefore, the solid does not update if the line changes.

Two Points : Sets the extrusion direction of all selected chains based on the direction of the axis defined by
two points that you enter using the Point Entry menu. The first point that you enter functions as the
endpoint of the direction vector, and the extrusion direction moves away from this point toward the
second point that you enter. The points are not associative; therefore, the solid does not update if the
points that you enter are actual point entities and they change.

Reverse It : Reverses the current extrusion direction of all selected chains.

Reverse One : Reverses the current extrusion direction of one chain that you select.

Done : Accepts the draft direction indicated by the direction arrow on the reference geometry.

Note: The extrusion direction cannot be parallel to the plane defined by the selected chains of curves
because you cannot extrude a chain sideways.

Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves

The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts
on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the
shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further
define the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains that
you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine operations, and what construction
method you use.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Revolve.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat).

3. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. A direction arrow displays on the
selected line, and the Revolve menu displays.

4. Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed, then choose Done to set the axis.

5. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform:

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

6. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

184
¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

7. Set additional parameters as needed, then choose OK. The system performs the revolve operation
or prompts you to:

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction
method.

¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one
visible solid in the file.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Selecting a rotation axis

The rotation axis is the line about which the system revolves the chains of curves to form a revolved solid.
You can select any line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis, including a line on the selected
chain of curves. The axis line is associative; therefore, you must regenerate the solid to update the
association between the line and the solid if the line changes.
The default rotation direction is determined when you select a line to use as the rotation axis. The
endpoint closest to the cursor’s position when you select the line defines the base point of the axis’
direction vector. The start and end angles are then measured in a positive sense about the axis, which sets
the rotation direction.

Note: The rotation direction follows the right-hand rule , with the axis’ direction vector representing the
positive Z axis.
The Revolve menu, which displays after you select a line to use as the rotation axis, gives you options for
selecting a different line and for reversing the rotation direction. You can also access this menu from the
Revolve Chain dialog box if you need to edit the rotation axis at a later time. When this menu displays, a
direction arrow also displays on the selected line to show the current rotation direction.

Axis : Returns you to the graphics window where you can select a new line to use as the rotation axis.

Reverse : Reverses the current rotation direction.

Done : Accepts the current rotation axis and direction.

Note: The revolve operation fails if the axis line causes the solid to self-intersect.

Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves

The Sweep function lets you sweep closed, planar chains of curves, called section chains, to create one or
more new solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system sweeps chains

185
of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of
curves, called the path chain. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained
throughout each resulting swept solid. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the
number of chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, and whether you combine operations.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Sweep.

2. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep, then choose Done.

Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat).

3. Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path, then choose Done.

4. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

5. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

6. Choose OK. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you
chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves

The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body, a cut on an existing body,
or a boss on an existing body. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more
chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between
the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. The start point of each chain and the
Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it
transitions between them.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Loft.

2. (optional) Choose Sync, select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box,
then choose Done.

3. Select two or more closed chains of curves.

4. Indicate the type of blend method to use:

186
¨ To create a smooth blend, check Create as Ruled

¨ To create a linear blend, clear Create as Ruled

5. Indicate the type of loft operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

6. Choose OK to close the dialog box. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to
select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid
in the file.

Notes:

¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file; however, Mastercam does not support
loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

¨ For a Loft operation to succeed, the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria:

Each individual chain of curves must be planar; however, the set of chains that you select does not have to
be planar.
Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary.
All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction.
You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation.
A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.

Time-saving tips for creating lofted solids

Lofted solids sometimes require a large amount of processing time, especially when the lofted solid is
defined by many chains or if some or all of the chains contain splines. You can increase the calculation
speed for lofted solids by trying one or more of the following actions:

¨ Limit the number of chains to four or five and select the chains that provide the most accurate
overall definition for the solid.

¨ Create the lofted solid as a ruled solid, which takes less time to calculate, by selecting the Create as
Ruled parameter on the Loft Chain dialog box .

¨ Use a sync method when selecting the chains. By indicating how the chains should be aligned, you
reduce the time it takes for the system to calculate the solid.

¨ Create the lofted solid in multiple operations using four or five adjacent chains at a time. Create
the first lofted solid as a separate body, then create each additional lofted solid as a boss on the first body.

187
Thin-wall vs. regular method of constructing solids

When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves, you have the
option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. The most significant
difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. With the regular
method, the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves,
which must be closed, then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. With the thin-wall
construction method, the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities
(similar to surfaces), then thickens the sheet entities to form solids.

For example, if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method, the result is a
cube-shaped solid, which has four vertical walls. If, however, you extrude a square using the thin-wall
construction method, the result is a hollowed-out, cube-shaped solid, which has eight vertical walls (four
interior and four exterior).
Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. While this interim body is not an entity
type that you can create or manipulate on your own, Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by
stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed
solid bodies.

The following differences further distinguish the construction methods:

¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction
method. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method.

¨ With the regular construction method, each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested
chains results in a separate solid, cut, or boss. With the thin-wall construction method, each chain of curves
results in a separate solid, cut, or boss, regardless of whether the chains are nested.

¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method, you
must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation
so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values.

¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method, you must use the default
extrusion direction, which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. With the regular construction
method, you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu.

¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method, you have the
option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft
angle to the solid’s walls.

Combining solid operations

When you create a new cut or boss operation by extruding, revolving, or sweeping chains of curves, you
can tell Mastercam to combine operations on multiple chains into a single operation instead of creating a
separate operation for each chain. You choose this option by selecting Combine Operations in the Extrude
Chain, Revolve Chain, or Sweep Chain dialog box. You can combine operations only when creating new cuts
or bosses on an existing body.
You cannot combine operations when creating a new solid body or modifying parameters from the Solids
Manager. You can, however, combine operations when modifying the geometry of existing Extrude,
Revolve, or Sweep Cut/Boss operations by adding new chains, even if Combine Operations was not
selected during initial creation.

188
You can also tell Mastercam to combine appropriate operations when you create operations as part of
finding features on a brick solid, In this case, Mastercam aggregates operations on selected chains (for
holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation.
Combining operations makes it easier to modify similar or repetitive operations involving multiple chains,
since you only have to edit parameters once from the Solids Manager.

Stitching surfaces into solids

The From Surfaces function lets you create one or more solids from selected surfaces by "stitching" them
together. If you select all surfaces, and edge gaps between surfaces are within a specified tolerance, a
closed solid body is created. Otherwise, an open sheet body is created. This function is useful for working
on imported files containing surface representations of a solid or for converting newly constructed surfaces
that may have been created to replace problem surfaces. Stitching surfaces can result in the same kind of
sheet solid as removing one or more faces from a closed solid body.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, From surfaces. The Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box
opens.

2. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed, then choose OK to complete the operation.

¨ If you selected Use all visible surfaces, Mastercam immediately converts all visible surfaces into
one or more solids.

¨ If you cleared Use all visible surfaces, the Select surfaces menu displays. Select one or more
surfaces in the graphics window, then choose Done to convert the selected surfaces into one or more
solids.

Notes:

¨ If Mastercam cannot create a closed solid body, a message asks, "Create edge curves on open
edges?" Choose Yes to select a color for the edge curves and create an open sheet body with edge-curve
geometry. Choose No to create the open sheet body without edge-curve geometry.

¨ You can change an open sheet body into a closed solid body by thickening it.

¨ You can set default parameter values for the Stitch Surfaces into Solid(s) dialog box by choosing
Solids Settings, Stitching from the CAD Settings tab of the System Configuration dialog box.

Creating solids in pre-defined (primitive) shapes

The Primitives menu gives you options for creating primitive solids. These solids are not defined by curve
geometry. Instead, they are solids that are created in simple, predefined shapes. Mastercam displays the
Primitives menu when you choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Primitives.

Creating a cylinder-shaped primitive solid

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Primitives, Cylinder. Mastercam creates a cylinder-shaped
solid in the graphics window.

189
2. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cylinder menu as follows:

¨ To set the size of the cylinder, choose Height and Radius. After choosing either option, you must
enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the orientation of the cylinder, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis.

¨ To set the position of the cylinder, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the cylinder’s bottom face.

3. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Cylinder" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

4. Choose Done to exit the Cylinder menu.

Notes:

¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type, Mastercam creates each new solid using the
exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. They are exact duplicates unless you
modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating a cone-shaped primitive solid

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Primitives, Cone. Mastercam creates a cone-shaped solid in
the graphics window.

2. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Cone menu as follows:

¨ To set the size of the cone, choose Height, Btm radius, Top radius, and Taper angle. After choosing
any of these options, you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the orientation of the cone, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis.

¨ To set the position of the cone, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the cone’s bottom face.

3. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Cone" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

4. Choose Done to exit the Cone menu.

Notes:

¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type, Mastercam creates each new solid using the
exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. They are exact duplicates unless you
modify the parameters of one of them.

190
Creating a block-shaped primitive solid

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Primitives, Block. Mastercam creates a block-shaped solid
in the graphics window.

2. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Block menu as follows:

¨ To set the size of the block, choose Height, Length, and Width. After choosing any of these options,
you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the position of the block, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the block’s bottom face.

¨ To set the orientation of the block, choose Axis (H) and Axis (L). Use the Axis Selection menu to set
the axes that correspond to the block’s height and length. You can also choose Rotate to revolve the block
about its base point by an angle value that you enter in the prompt area.

¨ To set the block’s position and 2D size in one step, choose Corners. Enter two points in the graphics
window for opposing corners of the block’s bottom face. Mastercam updates the length, width, and base
point. The block’s height is unchanged.

3. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Block" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

4. Choose Done to exit the Block menu.

Notes:

¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type, Mastercam creates each new solid using the
exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. They are exact duplicates unless you
modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating a sphere-shaped primitive solid

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Primitives, Sphere. Mastercam creates a sphere-shaped
solid in the graphics window.

2. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Sphere menu as follows:

¨ To set the size of the sphere, choose Radius, then enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the position of the block, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the sphere.

3. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Sphere" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

191
4. Choose Done to exit the Sphere menu.

Notes:

¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type, Mastercam creates each new solid using the
exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. They are exact duplicates unless you
modify the parameters of one of them.

Creating a torus-shaped primitive solid

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Primitives, Torus. Mastercam creates a torus-shaped solid
in the graphics window.

2. Modify the solid by setting parameters on the Torus menu as follows:

¨ To set the size of the torus, choose Maj radius and Min radius. After choosing either of these
options, you must enter a value in the prompt area.

¨ To set the orientation of the torus, choose Axis. Use the Axis Selection menu to set the axis.

¨ To set the position of the torus, choose Base point. Enter a point in the graphics window for the
center of the torus’ hole.

3. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Torus" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

4. Choose Done to exit the Torus menu.

Notes:

¨ If you create multiple primitive solids of a given type, Mastercam creates each new solid using the
exact parameters as the previously created solid of the same type. They are exact duplicates unless you
modify the parameters of one of them.

Modifying Solids
Removing faces from a solid

The Remove Faces function lets you remove selected faces from a solid, resulting in an open sheet body.
You can remove faces from either a closed solid body or a sheet entity. You may use this function to
remove faces that have problems identified by the Check Solid function or to remove faces so that new
surfaces can be constructed and then stitched using the From Surfaces function. Removing one or more
faces from a solid can result in the same kind of sheet solid as Stitching from surfaces whose edge gaps are
too large to create a closed solid body.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Remove faces.

2. Select the faces to remove, then choose Done. The Remove Faces From a Solid dialog box opens.

192
3. Indicate whether to keep, blank, or delete the original solid and what level the resulting solid will
be placed on.

4. Choose OK to complete the operation.

Thickening a sheet solid

The Thicken function lets you thicken an open sheet solid and thereby convert it into a closed solid body.
You can use this function in conjunction with the From Surfaces function to turn selected surfaces into a
solid that can be managed like any other solid created in Mastercam.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Thicken.

2. Select a sheet solid in the graphics window. The Thicken sheet solid dialog box opens.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window and it is a sheet solid, Mastercam selects it
automatically, and this step is unnecessary.

3. In the Name text box, enter a name that will identify this operation in history (or use the default
entry, "Thicken").

4. To specify a thickness, accept or change the value in the Thickness text box.

5. Indicate which side of the solid to thicken:

¨ One Side. To thicken one side only, choose One side, then choose OK. A direction arrow displays on
the selected solid, indicating which side will be thickened, and the Sheet thickening direction menu
displays. To reverse the thickening direction, choose Flip. Choose OK to complete the operation.

¨ Both Sides. To thicken both sides, choose Both sides, then choose OK to complete the operation.

Creating cuts on a solids

Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves

The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts
on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the
shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction, distance, and other parameters that
further define the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains
that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine operations, and what construction
method you use.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Extrude.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat), but all chains do not have to be in the same plane.

3. Set the extrusion direction. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves
to reflect its current extrusion direction.

193
Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves.

4. Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

5. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

6. Set additional parameters as needed, then choose OK. The system performs the extrude operation
or prompts you to:

¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point.

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction
method.

¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one
visible solid in the file.

¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves

The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts
on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the
shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further
define the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains that
you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine operations, and what construction
method you use.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Revolve.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat).

3. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. A direction arrow displays on the
selected line, and the Revolve menu displays.

194
4. Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed, then choose Done to set the axis.

5. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform:

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

6. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

7. Set additional parameters as needed, then choose OK. The system performs the revolve operation
or prompts you to:

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction
method.

¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one
visible solid in the file.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves

The Sweep function lets you sweep closed, planar chains of curves, called section chains, to create one or
more new solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system sweeps chains
of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of
curves, called the path chain. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained
throughout each resulting swept solid. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the
number of chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, and whether you combine operations.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Sweep.

2. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep, then choose Done.

Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat).

3. Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path, then choose Done.

4. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

195
¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

5. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

6. Choose OK. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you
chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves

The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body, a cut on an existing body,
or a boss on an existing body. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more
chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between
the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. The start point of each chain and the
Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it
transitions between them.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Loft.

2. (optional) Choose Sync, select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box,
then choose Done.

3. Select two or more closed chains of curves.

4. Indicate the type of blend method to use:

¨ To create a smooth blend, check Create as Ruled

¨ To create a linear blend, clear Create as Ruled

5. Indicate the type of loft operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

6. Choose OK to close the dialog box. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to
select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid
in the file.

196
Notes:

¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file; however, Mastercam does not support
loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

¨ For a Loft operation to succeed, the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria:

Each individual chain of curves must be planar; however, the set of chains that you select does not have to
be planar.
Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary.
All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction.
You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation.
A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.

Thin-wall vs. regular method of constructing solids

When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves, you have the
option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. The most significant
difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. With the regular
method, the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves,
which must be closed, then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. With the thin-wall
construction method, the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities
(similar to surfaces), then thickens the sheet entities to form solids.

For example, if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method, the result is a
cube-shaped solid, which has four vertical walls. If, however, you extrude a square using the thin-wall
construction method, the result is a hollowed-out, cube-shaped solid, which has eight vertical walls (four
interior and four exterior).
Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. While this interim body is not an entity
type that you can create or manipulate on your own, Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by
stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed
solid bodies.

The following differences further distinguish the construction methods:

¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction
method. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method.

¨ With the regular construction method, each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested
chains results in a separate solid, cut, or boss. With the thin-wall construction method, each chain of curves
results in a separate solid, cut, or boss, regardless of whether the chains are nested.

¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method, you
must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation
so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values.

¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method, you must use the default
extrusion direction, which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. With the regular construction
method, you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu.

197
¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method, you have the
option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft
angle to the solid’s walls.

Creating/modifying solids by extruding chains of curves

The Extrude function lets you extrude planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts
on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system extrudes chains of curves by driving the
shape of the curves along a linear path using a specified direction, distance, and other parameters that
further define the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains
that you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine operations, and what construction
method you use.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Extrude.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: Each chain that you select must be planar (flat), but all chains do not have to be in the same plane.

3. Set the extrusion direction. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on each selected chain of curves
to reflect its current extrusion direction.

Note: The default extrusion direction is normal (perpendicular) to the curves.

4. Indicate the type of extrude operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

5. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

6. Set additional parameters as needed, then choose OK. The system performs the extrude operation
or prompts you to:

¨ Enter a point if you chose to extend the extruded chains to a point.

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction
method.

¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one
visible solid in the file.

¨ Select a face if you chose to trim a cut or boss operation to a selected face.

198
Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
extrude operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Creating/modifying solids by revolving chains of curves

The Revolve function lets you revolve planar chains of curves to create one or more new solid bodies, cuts
on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system revolves chains of curves by driving the
shape of the curves about an axis using given start and end angles and other parameters that further
define the results. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the number of chains that
you select, whether the chains are nested, whether you combine operations, and what construction
method you use.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Revolve.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat).

3. Select a line in the graphics window to use as the rotation axis. A direction arrow displays on the
selected line, and the Revolve menu displays.

4. Change the rotation axis and/or direction as needed, then choose Done to set the axis.

5. Indicate the type of revolve operation to perform:

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

6. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 5),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

7. Set additional parameters as needed, then choose OK. The system performs the revolve operation
or prompts you to:

¨ Indicate the outward direction for open chains of curves if you chose the thin-wall construction
method.

¨ Select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one
visible solid in the file.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
revolve operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

199
Creating/modifying solids by sweeping chains of curves

The Sweep function lets you sweep closed, planar chains of curves, called section chains, to create one or
more new solid bodies, cuts on an existing body, or bosses on an existing body. The system sweeps chains
of curves by translating and rotating the shape of the curves along the entire distance of a single chain of
curves, called the path chain. The angle between the section chains and the path chain is maintained
throughout each resulting swept solid. The number of resulting solids, cuts, or bosses depends on the
number of chains that you select, whether the chains are nested, and whether you combine operations.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Sweep.

2. Select one or more closed chains of curves to sweep, then choose Done.

Note: The set of chains that you select must be planar (flat).

3. Select one curve or chain of curves for the sweep path, then choose Done.

4. Indicate the type of sweep operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

5. If you selected more than one chain (step 2) and chose either Cut Body or Add Boss (step 4),
indicate whether or not to combine operations:

¨ To combine multi-chain selections into a single operation, select Combine Operations.

¨ To process each chain selection as a separate operation, clear Combine Operations.

6. Choose OK. The system performs the sweep operation or prompts you to select a target solid if you
chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid in the file.

Note: You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file. However, Mastercam does not support
sweep operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

Creating/modifying solids by lofting chains of curves

The Loft function lets you loft closed chains of curves to create a new solid body, a cut on an existing body,
or a boss on an existing body. The system performs a loft operation by transitioning between two or more
chains of curves in the order that you select them using either smooth or ruled (linear) blending between
the chains and by capping the first and last chains with solid faces. The start point of each chain and the
Sync method that you use when selecting the chains affect how the system aligns the selected chains as it
transitions between them.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Loft.

2. (optional) Choose Sync, select a Sync option from the Chain Synchronization Options dialog box,
then choose Done.

200
3. Select two or more closed chains of curves.

4. Indicate the type of blend method to use:

¨ To create a smooth blend, check Create as Ruled

¨ To create a linear blend, clear Create as Ruled

5. Indicate the type of loft operation to perform:

¨ To create new solid bodies, choose Create Body.

¨ To remove material from an existing body, choose Cut Body.

¨ To add material to an existing body, choose Add Boss.

6. Choose OK to close the dialog box. The system performs the loft operation or prompts you to
select a target solid if you chose to perform a cut or boss operation and there is more than one visible solid
in the file.

Notes:

¨ You can create multiple solids in a single Mastercam file; however, Mastercam does not support
loft operations that would result in disjoint bodies.

¨ For a Loft operation to succeed, the selected chains of curves must meet the following criteria:

Each individual chain of curves must be planar; however, the set of chains that you select does not have to
be planar.
Each chain of curves must form a closed boundary.
All of the chains that you select must follow the same chaining direction.
You cannot select a chain of curves more than once for a given loft operation.
A selected chain of curves cannot self-intersect.

Thin-wall vs. regular method of constructing solids

When you use the Extrude or Revolve functions to generate solids from chains of curves, you have the
option to create the solids using the regular or the thin-wall construction method. The most significant
difference between the construction methods is how Mastercam calculates the solid. With the regular
method, the system creates a sheet entity (similar to a trimmed surface) within the boundary of the curves,
which must be closed, then extrudes or revolves the sheet entity into a solid. With the thin-wall
construction method, the system extrudes or revolves each entity in the chain to form sheet entities
(similar to surfaces), then thickens the sheet entities to form solids.

For example, if you extrude a square into a solid using the regular construction method, the result is a
cube-shaped solid, which has four vertical walls. If, however, you extrude a square using the thin-wall
construction method, the result is a hollowed-out, cube-shaped solid, which has eight vertical walls (four
interior and four exterior).

201
Note: Mastercam calculates sheet entities when creating solids. While this interim body is not an entity
type that you can create or manipulate on your own, Mastercam does let you create sheet entities by
stitching surfaces or by removing faces from a solid. You can then thicken sheet entities to create closed
solid bodies.

The following differences further distinguish the construction methods:

¨ You can use open or closed chains of curves when creating solids with the thin-wall construction
method. You can use only closed chains with the regular construction method.

¨ With the regular construction method, each non-nested chain of curves or each set of nested
chains results in a separate solid, cut, or boss. With the thin-wall construction method, each chain of curves
results in a separate solid, cut, or boss, regardless of whether the chains are nested.

¨ When you extrude or revolve open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method, you
must select the outward direction (to distinguish it from the inward direction) at the end of the operation
so that the system knows how to apply the inward and outward thickening values.

¨ When extruding curves using the thin-wall construction method, you must use the default
extrusion direction, which is normal to the first selected chain of curves. With the regular construction
method, you can set the direction using any option on the Extrusion Direction menu.

¨ When extruding open chains of curves using the thin-wall construction method, you have the
option to draft the faces associated with the endpoints of open chains of curves when you apply a draft
angle to the solid’s walls.

Chamfering solid edges

When you choose Chamfer from the Solids menu, the Chamfer menu displays to give you options for
creating chamfers, or beveled edges, on solids. A chamfer is a type of edge blending that has a linear cross-
section. The system chamfers solid edges by introducing new faces that add material to or remove material
from the selected edges and that are not tangent with the adjoining faces of the original edge. You
determine the extent of the chamfer by specifying distances and possibly an angle to offset the chamfer
from the selected edge on the adjoining faces. Click on the topics below for more information.

Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If
edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body, the entire face or body remains
chamfered, regardless of the changes.

Chamfering a solid using one distance

This function defines a chamfer using one distance, which determines where the chamfer is positioned
along both edge faces.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Chamfer, 1 Distance. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select the edges, faces, and/or whole solid bodies to chamfer, then choose Done. The Chamfer
Parameters dialog box opens.

3. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed, then choose OK to chamfer the edges.

202
Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If
edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body, the entire face or body remains
chamfered, regardless of the changes.

Chamfering a solid using two distances

This function defines a chamfer using two distances, which determine where the chamfer is positioned
along the edge faces.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Chamfer, 2 Distances. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select a face or an edge.

3. If you selected an edge, Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. Select one of the two
faces that are adjacent to the edge, then choose Done.

Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the first distance that you define in step 5. See "Defining a
reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges, then choose Done. The Chamfer
Parameters dialog box opens.

5. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed, then choose OK to chamfer the edges.

Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If
edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body, the entire face or body remains
chamfered, regardless of the changes.

Chamfering a solid using a distance and an angle

This function defines a chamfer using a distance and an angle, which determine where the chamfer is
positioned along the edge faces.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Chamfer, Dist/Ang. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select a face or an edge.

3. If you selected an edge, Mastercam displays the Pick Reference Face menu. Select one of the two
faces that are adjacent to the edge, then choose Done.

Note: Mastercam uses this face to calculate the distance and angle that you define in step 5. See "Defining
a reference face" in the Related Topics below for more information.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select additional faces and/or edges, then choose Done. The Chamfer
Parameters dialog box opens.

5. Set parameters on the dialog box as needed, then choose OK to chamfer the edges.

203
Note: Chamfers that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If
edges are added to or removed from a chamfered face or body, the entire face or body remains
chamfered, regardless of the changes.

Trimming solids

The Trim Solids menu gives you options for trimming selected solids to a plane, to a surface, or to an open
sheet body, and for choosing whether or not to keep what was trimmed as new "bricks" (solid bodies with
no history). Mastercam displays this menu after you select the solids you want to trim (Main Menu, Solids,
Next menu, Trim).

Plane : Trims the solids to a plane that you define using the Define Plane menu.

Surface : Trims the solids to a surface that you select in the graphics window.

Sheet : Trims the solids to an open sheet solid that you select in the graphics window.

Flip : Reverses the trimming direction. The direction arrow in the graphics window points to the side of the
plane on which the solids will not be trimmed.

Keep All : When set to N, removes trimmed parts from the drawing. When set to Y, keeps trimmed parts in
the drawing as brick solids.

Name : Returns you to the prompt area where you can name the solid trim operation. The default name is
Trim.

Trimming solids to a plane

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Trim.

2. Select one or more solids in the graphics window, then choose Done.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically, and this step is
unnecessary.

3. Choose Plane from the Trim Solids menu. Mastercam displays the Define Plane menu.

204
4. Define the trimming plane. Mastercam displays a temporary plane marker in the graphics window.
The arrow points to the side of the plane on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the
history.

5. Choose Flip, if necessary, to reverse the trimming direction.

6. To keep trimmed parts as bricks, set Keep All to Y. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing, set
Keep All to N.

Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

7. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Trim" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

8. Choose Done to trim the solids.

Notes:

¨ The trimming plane must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it.

¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing, the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick
solids with no history. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history.

Trimming solids to a surface

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Trim.

2. Select one or more solids in the graphics window, then choose Done.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically, and this step is
unnecessary.

3. Choose Surface from the Trim Solids menu.

4. Select a surface in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the surface,
which points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the
history.

5. Choose Flip, if necessary, to reverse the trimming direction.

6. To keep trimmed parts as bricks, set Keep All to Y. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing, set
Keep All to N.

Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

7. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Trim" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

205
8. Choose Done to trim the solids.

Notes:

¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the
trimming surface. If you delete, move, or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer
fully intersects the solid, Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid.

¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it.

¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing, the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick
solids with no history. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history.

¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body
and then trimming to a sheet.

Trimming solids to a sheet

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Trim.

2. Select one or more solids in the graphics window, then choose Done.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically, and this step is
unnecessary.

3. Choose Sheet from the Trim Solids menu.

4. Select an open sheet body in the graphics window. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the
surface, which points to the side of the sheet body on which the solids will not be trimmed and which
retain the history.

5. Choose Flip, if necessary, to reverse the trimming direction.

6. To keep trimmed parts as bricks, set Keep All to Y. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing, set
Keep All to N.

Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

7. Choose Name, then enter a name for the solid operation in the prompt area.

Note: This step is optional. If you choose not to name the operation, Mastercam names it "Trim" by
default. You can change the name at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

8. Choose Done to trim the solids.

Notes:

¨ The edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim operation are associated with the
trimming surface. If you delete, move, or in any other way change the trimming surface so that it no longer
fully intersects the solid, Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid.

206
¨ The trimming surface must fully intersect a selected solid in order to trim it.

¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing, the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick
solids with no history. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history.

¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body
and then trimming to a sheet.

Shelling solids

The Shell function lets you hollow solid bodies by removing material and optionally leaving selected faces
open. The remaining faces are thickened by a specified amount. If you select individual faces on a solid, the
system hollows the solid, opens the selected faces to form entry holes into the solid, and thickens the
remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. If you select a whole solid body and no individual faces, the
system removes the material from the interior of the solid, which leaves a void, and thickens the solid’s
faces to form the solid’s shell.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Shell. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select the faces and/or whole solid bodies to shell, then choose Done. The Shell Solid dialog box
opens.

3. Set the shell direction and thickness as needed, then choose OK to shell the selected solids.

Note: When you shell whole solids, there are no entry holes into the solid, and you cannot see into the
solid if it is shaded. However, you can visualize the void in the interior of the solid if you use translucent
shading. Similarly, you can turn on the display of hidden lines to distinguish the solid’s inner walls.

Filleting solid edges

The Fillet function that you access from the Solids menu lets you fillet the edges of solids. Filleting is a type
of edge blending that results in a rounded edge by introducing new faces that are tangent to the edges’
adjacent faces.
A fillet is also referred to as a rolling ball blend because it has a circular cross-section, as if a ball is rolled
along each selected edge and material is either added to or removed from the ball’s path to form the
smooth edge. You determine the extent of the fillet by specifying the radius of the rolling ball or cross-
section. You can define the fillet’s radius using a constant radius value or by varying the radius value along
the edge.

Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If edges
are added to or removed from a filleted face or body, the entire face or body remains filleted, regardless of
the change.

Filleting solid edges using a constant radius

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Fillet.

2. Select one or more edges, faces, and/or whole solid bodies, then choose Done.

3. Choose Constant Radius.

207
4. Set other parameters as needed, then choose OK to create the fillets.

Note: Fillets that are created on the edges of selected faces or whole solid bodies are associative. If edges
are added to or removed from a filleted face or body, the entire face or body remains filleted, regardless of
the change.

Filleting solid edges using a variable radius

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Fillet.

2. Select one or more edges, then choose Done.

Note: You cannot create variable radius fillets if your selection includes solid faces or whole solid bodies.

3. Choose Variable Radius.

4. Set other parameters and edit radii as needed, then choose OK to create the fillets.

Varying the radius along filleted solid edges

The Fillet Edit menu gives you options for editing the radius of solid fillet operations that are defined using
a variable radius. You can use this menu to insert a radius, remove a radius, check radius values, and
change radius values. To access this menu, choose the Edit button on the Fillet Parameters dialog box
during the creation or editing of a solid fillet operation.

Inserting a radius at any position along a solid edge

1. Choose Insert Dyn from the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or
editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information.

2. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on
the selected edge.

3. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to insert a radius,
then click.

Note: To enter a radius at the position of an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the cursor
crosshair over the point, then click to snap to the point.

4. In the prompt area, enter a value for radius. Mastercam marks the position of the radius with a
display point in the graphics window.

5. Continue to edit the filleted edges, or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.

Inserting a radius midway between two existing radii along a solid edge

1. Choose Insert Mid from the Fillet Edit menu.

208
Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or
editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information.

2. Select an edge on the solid that you are filleting or editing. Mastercam displays a temporary point
to mark the midpoint between the two closest radii.

3. In the prompt area, enter a value for radius.

4. Continue to edit the filleted edges, or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.

Changing the position of a radius on a solid edge

1. Choose Modify Pos from the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or
editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information.

2. In the graphics window, select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want
to edit. Mastercam displays a dynamic arrow on the radius marker.

3. Use the mouse to slide the base of the arrow to the location where you want to position the radius,
then click.

Note: To position the radius at the location of an existing point, type [S] to activate snapping, move the
cursor crosshair over the point, then click to snap to the point.

4. Continue to edit the filleted edges, or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.

Changing the value of a radius on a solid edge

1. Choose Modify Rad from the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or
editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information.

2. In the graphics window, select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want
to edit. Mastercam displays the current value of the radius.

3. In the prompt area, enter a new value for radius.

4. Continue to edit the filleted edges, or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: You can also change the value of a radius by selecting it in the edge list of the Fillet Parameters
dialog box, then typing a new value in the Radius text box.

Removing a radius from a solid edge

1. Choose Remove from the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or
editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information.

209
2. In the graphics window, select the display point that marks the location of the radius that you want
to remove. Mastercam removes the display point at this location.

3. Continue to edit the filleted edges, or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: You can also remove a radius marker by right-clicking to select it in the edge list of the Fillet
Parameters dialog box, then choosing Remove from the right-click menu.

Checking and changing radius values on a solid edge

1. Choose Cycle from the Fillet Edit menu. Mastercam highlights a display point that marks the
location of a radius and displays the radius value at this location.

Note: This menu can be accessed by choosing Edit from the Fillet Parameters dialog box when creating or
editing a solid fillet operation using a variable radius. See the related topics below for more information.

2. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To change the value of the highlighted radius, type a new value for radius in the prompt area, then
press [Enter].

¨ To maintain the current value of the highlighted radius, press [Enter].

3. Mastercam cycles to the next radius. Repeat step 2 to check the remaining radius values. After the
last radius, Mastercam exits the function.

4. Continue to edit the filleted edges, or choose Done to exit the Fillet Edit menu.

Note: You can also check and change the value of a radius marker by selecting it in the edge list of the
Fillet Parameters dialog box, then typing a new value in the Radius text box.

Drafting solid faces

Drafting solid faces is the process of tilting the faces by a defined angle and direction. When draft is added
to a solid face, it has the effect of creating a tapered wall, which is particularly useful for mold-making. The
Draft Faces function lets you add draft to a face, change draft on a face, or remove draft from a face.
You can draft virtually any solid face, regardless of whether the solid was created in Mastercam or
imported from a Parasolid file. For example, a filleted face can be drafted, which changes its geometry
from cylindrical to planar, like a chamfered face.

When a face is drafted, the adjacent faces are trimmed and/or extended to accommodate the new
geometry of the drafted face. If the adjacent faces are unable to accommodate the new geometry, the
operation fails. Failure is more likely to occur with larger draft angles or if adjacent faces are tangent (or
near tangent) and are not also being drafted. In some cases, drafting results in faces being deleted from the
solid.
The Draft Faces function gives you four methods of drafting solid faces. The method that you use
determines where a drafted face hinges.

Drafting solid faces using a reference face

210
The Draft to Face method requires you to select a planar reference face, which is used to calculate where
the drafted face hinges and the draft direction. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original
face (the face selected to be drafted) and the reference face. The hinge point can be located on or off the
solid. The operation fails if there is no intersection. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference
face, and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. See the graphic following the procedure
for more information.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Draft faces. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select one or more faces to draft, then choose Done. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters
dialog box.

Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face
operation for each solid.

3. Choose Draft to Face.

4. Enter a value for Draft Angle. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted.

Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Failure is more likely with a larger angle.

5. Choose OK. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

Note: You can extend the draft along tangent faces by checking Propagate along tangencies on the Draft
Face Parameters dialog box before choosing OK.

6. Select a planar solid face. This face must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted.

7. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft
direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. If needed, choose
Reverse it to flip the draft direction, then choose Done.

Notes:

¨ The reference face that you select for the draft plane in step 6 is associated with the resulting Draft
Face operations. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference
face are reflected in the associated operations.

¨ When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.

¨ The following graphics show the side view of a solid, where one face is drafted using the Draft to
Face method. The first graphic illustrates how the hinge point, draft direction, and draft angle are
calculated. The second graphic shows the drafted face and how the adjacent faces were extended to
accommodate it.

211
Drafting solid faces using a reference plane

The Draft to Plane method requires you to define a reference plane, which is used to calculate where the
drafted face hinges and the draft direction. The drafted face hinges at the intersection of the original face
(the face selected to be drafted) and the reference plane. The hinge point can be located on or off the
solid. The operation fails if there is no intersection. The draft direction is perpendicular to the reference
plane, and the draft angle is measured with respect to the direction. See the graphic following the
procedure for more information.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Draft faces. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu

2. Select one or more faces to draft, then choose Done. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters
dialog box.

Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face
operation for each solid.

212
3. Choose Draft to Plane.

4. Enter a value for Draft Angle. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted.

Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Failure is more likely with a larger angle.

5. Choose OK. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu.

6. Define the reference plane. This plane must have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted.

7. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft
direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. If needed, choose
Reverse it to flip the draft direction, then choose Done.

Notes:

¨ The reference plane that you define in step 6 is not associated with the resulting Draft Face
operations, even if you defined the plane using geometry, such as a geometric line, a solid face, etc.

¨ When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.

¨ The following graphics show the left side of a block drafted using the XY plane with a Z value of .5.

Drafting solid faces using one or more reference edges

The Draft to Edge method requires you to select one or more edges on each face being drafted. The
reference edges that you select define the hinge points for the drafted faces. The draft direction is defined
by a selected linear edge or planar face. For a linear edge, the draft direction follows the edge. For a planar
face, the draft direction is perpendicular to the face. The draft angle is measured with respect to the
direction.

213
1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Draft faces. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select one or more faces to draft, then choose Done. Mastercam opens the Draft Face Parameters
dialog box.

Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Face
operation for each solid.

3. Choose Draft to Edge.

4. Enter a value for Draft Angle. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted.

Note: A larger value results in more tilt. Failure is more likely with a larger angle.

5. Choose OK. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

6. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics
window, then choose Done. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face.

7. Mastercam cycles to the next selected face if more than one face was selected in step 2. Repeat
step 6 for each additional face.

8. Specify the draft direction by selecting a linear edge or a planar face.

9. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the
draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. If needed,
choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction, then choose Done.

Notes:

¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 6 and 7 and the linear edge or planar face that you
select in step 8 are associated with the resulting Draft Face operations. Changes that you make to the solid
to alter the position or orientation of the reference edges or linear edge or planar face are reflected in the
associated operations.

¨ When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.

¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face, Mastercam attempts to break the original face into
multiple drafted faces, a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. This application of this draft
method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the
draft direction, such as with a dovetail shape. The following graphics show a face that is successfully
drafted using multiple reference edges (highlighted in red).

214
Drafting solid faces for an extrude operation

The Draft Extrude method requires you to select lateral faces (walls) swept out from an extrude operation.
The drafted faces hinge at the intersection of the original faces (the faces selected to be drafted) with the
planar chains of curves that defined the original extrude operation. The draft direction follows the
extrusion direction, and the draft angle is measured with respect to this direction.
Note: When you perform an extrude operation, you have the option to draft the resulting lateral faces.
However, all of the lateral faces are drafted using the same draft angle and direction.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Draft faces. Mastercam displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

2. Select one or more faces to draft. All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept
out from an extrude operation. After selecting the faces, choose Done. Mastercam opens the Draft Face
Parameters dialog box.

Note: You can select faces from more than one solid. Mastercam will create a separate Draft Faces
operation for each solid.

3. Choose Draft Extrude.

4. Enter a value for Draft Angle. This value determines how much the selected faces are tilted.

Notes:

¨ A larger value results in more tilt. Failure is more likely with a larger angle.

¨ This value can be positive or negative. A positive value is measured with respect to the extrusion
direction. A negative value is measured with respect to the direction opposite the extrusion direction.

5. Choose OK to draft the faces.

Notes:

215
¨ When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.

¨ The following graphics show an extruded solid whose lateral faces have been drafted along the
extrusion direction. The curves that defined the original extrude operation are highlighted in red and now
form the hinges for the drafted faces.

Performing a Boolean operation

The Boolean menu, which displays when you choose Boolean from the Solids menu, lets you select from
several types of Boolean functions. Boolean functions let you construct a solid using combinations of two
or more existing solids. You can add solids together, subtract solids from one another, and find the
common region defined by overlapping solids.
When performing a Boolean function, you must first identify a target body. This is the solid that material is
added to, removed from, or overlapped. You then select one or more tool bodies, which are the solids that
are added to, removed from, or overlapped with the target body. Regardless of the number of tool bodies
you use, the result of each Boolean operation is always a single body.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Boolean. Mastercam displays the Boolean menu.

2. Indicate the type of Boolean operation to perform:

¨ To add solids together, choose Add. Material from the tool bodies that you select in step 4 will be
added to the target body that you select in step 3.

¨ To remove solids from one another, choose Remove. In places where the tool bodies that you
select in step 4 intersect the target body that you select in step 3, material will be removed, which results
in cuts on the target body.

¨ To find common solid regions, choose Common. In places where the tool bodies that you select in
step 4 and the target body that you select in step 3 overlap, material will be kept; all other material will be
removed.

216
3. Select a target body.

4. Select one or more tool bodies, then choose Done to perform the Boolean operation.

5. If a Boolean Remove or Common operation fails because it would create a disjoint body, a message
displays giving you the option to create a non-associative Boolean (a brick solid). Respond in one of the
following ways:

¨ Choose Yes to continue the Boolean operation and display the Keep menu. Set Target to Y (keep
target body) or N (remove target body). Set Tools to Y (keep tool body) or N (remove tool body). Then
choose Done to complete the Boolean operation.

¨ Choose No to cancel the Boolean operation.

Note: Mastercam is unable to create disjoint bodies and maintain associativity between them. Creating
and keeping a non-associative Boolean will create entirely new brick solids that represent the resulting
disjoint pieces, without changing either the target or the tool.

Symbols used in the Solids Manager

The Solids Manager uses many symbols to communicate information about operations. Each symbol is
described below:

Symbol Description

Marks a dirty operation. An operation is dirty when its parameters and/or geometry have been
modified. You must regenerate the solid in order for the changes to be incorporated into the model at
which point the operation will be ‘clean’ and the dirty symbol will be removed.

Marks an invalid operation. An operation is invalid when a change has been made that Mastercam
is unable to incorporate into the model, thus preventing the solid from being rebuilt. To correct an invalid
solid, try adjusting the parameters or geometry of any invalid operations, then regenerating the solid.

Marks the end of the operations that define a solid. You can roll back a solid to a previous state by
dragging the stop operation icon to a new position in the operation list.

Indicates that the move is allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. You can drag
operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order.

Indicates that the move is not allowed when dragging an operation in the operation list. You can
drag operations to roll back a solid or to change the operation order.

Indicates that there are additional operation details. Clicking on this symbol expands the tree
structure of operation details.

217
Indicates that the operation details are expanded. Clicking on this symbol collapses the tree structure
of operation details.

Indicates that there are editable parameters for this operation. Double-click this icon to edit the
parameters.

Indicates that there is editable geometry for this operation. Double-click this icon to edit the
geometry.

When an icon has been grayed out, it indicates that the operation has been suppressed and/or that
the solid is in a rolled back state.

Indicates a Mill or Lathe toolpath operation.

Indicates a solid.

Indicates a tool body or solid that is used in the associated Boolean operation.

Indicates an Extrude, Loft, or Sweep operation.

Indicates a Revolve operation.

Indicates a Fillet operation.

Indicates a Chamfer operation.

Indicates a Shell operation.

Indicates a Boolean operation.

Indicates a Primitive Cylinder operation.

Indicates a Primitive Cone operation.

218
Indicates a Primitive Block operation.

Indicates a Primitive Sphere operation.

Indicates a Primitive Torus operation.

Indicates a Draft Face operation.

Indicates a Trim operation.

Deleting solids and solid operations

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. Mastercam opens the Solids Manager dialog
box.

2. Select one or more solids or solid operations to delete.

Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only.

3. Right-click in the dialog box, then choose Delete, or press the Delete key on your keyboard.

4. If you selected operations to delete in step 3, Mastercam marks the corresponding solid dirty.
Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ Mastercam automatically deletes all operations whose input (selected faces, edges, bodies) is
dependent on the deleted operation.

¨ You cannot delete base operations or tool bodies.

¨ If you delete a Boolean operation, its tool bodies are restored as distinct solids that are no longer
associated with the target body.

¨ You can use Mastercam’s Delete function to delete and restore solids, but not individual
operations. See the related topics below for more information.

Suppressing solid operations

The Suppress function lets you build a solid without factoring in selected operations. This way you can
check the model in various states without having to delete and recreate operations.
It is important that you use the Suppress function only as a temporary model checking feature and that you
pay attention to what actions you take while operations are suppressed. Due to the dependent nature of
solid operations, your actions could render the model invalid when you restore the suppressed operations.

219
1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select one or more operations to suppress.

Note: You can select multiple operations from a single solid only.

3. Right-click in the dialog box, then choose Suppress. Mastercam rebuilds the model without the
selected operations and grays out the icons of the suppressed operations in the list. If other operations are
dependent on the suppressed operation, the system automatically suppresses them, as well.

Notes:

¨ A check mark displays next to the Suppress icon on the right-click menu of each suppressed
operation. To restore a suppressed operation, follow the steps above. When you select the Suppress
option a second time, the check mark is cleared, and the operation is restored. If the operation is
suppressed and does not have a check mark next to the Suppress option, the operation can be
unsuppressed only by unsuppressing the operation on which it is dependent.

¨ While an operation is suppressed, you cannot edit its parameters or geometry or select it for use in
any other operation.

¨ You cannot suppress a base operation.

Rolling back a solid

All solids listed in the Solids Manager, including tool bodies, have a stop operation icon that marks the end
of the operations that define the solid. You can roll back, or revert, a solid to an earlier stage in its
development by moving the Stop Op icon to different positions in the operation list. When a solid is in a
rolled back state, the system builds the model to the stop point only. All operations beyond the stop point
are suppressed and are grayed out in the operation list.

The roll back feature is commonly used to fix invalid operations or to build a model one operation at a time
when you are editing operations. However, it is extremely important that you roll back a solid only as a
temporary model checking feature and that you pay attention to what actions you take while the solid is
rolled back. Due to the dependent nature of solid operations, your actions could render the model invalid
when you return the stop operation to the end of the solid.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select a stop operation to roll back.

3. Drag it up through the history tree until it is positioned over a selected operation, then release the
mouse button. The system rebuilds the model up to the stop operation.

Notes:

¨ The stop operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it.

¨ To return the solid to its original state, drag the Stop Op icon to the last operation in the list. When
you release the mouse button, the operation is inserted after the final operation in the list.

220
¨ When a solid is rolled back, operations that you perform are added to the end of the active
operations in the model (before the stop point), instead of at the end of the operation list. Therefore, you
may find the roll back function a useful way to insert an operation in the middle of the operation list
instead of adding it to the end of the list, then dragging to the correct position, which sometimes fails due
to operation dependencies.

Identifying a solid operation based on its geometry

You can identify an operation in the Solids Manager by selecting geometry in the graphics window.
Mastercam matches the selected geometry (a solid face) with the operation that is defined by the
geometry.
This function is particularly useful when you are working on a complex solid that has a large number of
operations. You can quickly identify the operation you’re looking for instead of having to check multiple
operations using automatic or manual highlighting.
Note: For more information on highlighting, see the related topics below.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Choose Select. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window.

3. Select a solid face. Mastercam reopens the Solids Manager with the corresponding operation
selected.

Renaming solids and solid operations

The name assigned to a solid or solid operation can help identify it in the operation list of the Solids
Manager. When you perform a solid operation, you have the option to assign it a unique name, or you can
accept the default name, which reflects the operation type (e.g., Extrude Cut, Boolean Remove, Fillet, etc.).
Unlike solid operations, solids cannot be assigned unique names when they are created. However, you can
rename both solids and solid operations at any time from the Solids Manager.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select a solid or operation.

3. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Rename. The current name changes to an editable
field.

4. Type a new name, then press [Enter].

Note: You can also rename an operation by editing the operation’s parameters and entering a new name
in the Name field.

Changing the order of solid operations

The Solids Manager lists the operations that define each solid in the current file. The operations are listed
in the order in which they are performed on the solid. You can change the order by dragging operations to
new positions in the operation list. Mastercam will rebuild the solid based on the new operation order.

221
1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select an operation to move.

3. With the mouse button pressed, drag the operation to the desired position in the operation list,
then release the mouse button. Mastercam rebuilds the solid using the current operation order.

Notes:

¨ The selected operation is inserted after the operation on which you release it.

¨ As you drag an operation, the cursor changes to a downward arrow if the move is allowed or to a
circle with a slash through it if the move is not allowed. The following moves are not allowed:

¨ You cannot move a base operation.

¨ You cannot move an operation to a position before a base operation.

¨ If an operation is dependent on one or more other operations, you cannot move it to a position
ahead of the operation(s) on which it is dependent in the list.

Regenerating solids

Regeneration is the process of rebuilding a solid so that it matches its associated operations. Regeneration
is required when a solid becomes dirty or invalid due to changes that you make to the parameters and/or
geometry of one or more of the solid’s operations. When you regenerate a solid, Mastercam incorporates
your changes into the solid and restores the solid to a clean state, if possible. Regeneration fails if a solid
has one or more invalid operations.
When making a lot of changes to a model, it is useful to regenerate often. This way, if regeneration fails,
you will have to make fewer corrections to return the operation to a valid state. For more information on
dirty and invalid operations, see the related topics below.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To regenerate all dirty or invalid solids, choose Regen All.

¨ To regenerate an individual solid, right-click to select the solid, then choose Regen Solid.

Accessing Solids menu options from the Solids Manager

You can access the Solids menu options from the Solids Manager, which enables you to perform new solid
operations without having to exit the Solids Manager dialog box.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

222
3. Choose Solids. Mastercam displays a flyout menu containing all of the Solids menu options. For
more information, see the related topics.

Accessing the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager

You can access the toolpath Operations Manager from the Solids Manager, which enables you to edit Mill
or Lathe toolpaths that were created on solids and to access other toolpath functions without having to
exit the Solids Manager dialog box.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Right-click anywhere in the list of operations.

3. Choose Operations Manager. Mastercam closes the Solids Manager dialog box and opens the
Operations Manager dialog box.

4. Perform functions from the toolpath Operations Manager, as needed. When you close the
Operations Manager, Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager.

Note: For information on the toolpath Operations Manager, see the related topics below.

Expanding and collapsing solid operation details

The Solids Manager lists the operation history for each solid in the current file. You can expand or collapse
the tree structure of a solid to show or hide a list of operations that define the solid. Likewise, you can
expand or collapse the tree structure of each operation to show or hide its editable components (e.g.,
parameters and geometry).
Note: Imported solids have no operation history. The tree structure of an imported solid lists only the
operations that have been performed on the solid since it was imported into Mastercam.

Expanding operation details

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To expand an individual operation, click on the plus (+) sign preceding the operation.

¨ To expand all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Expand all.

Collapsing operation details

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Take one of the following actions:

¨ To collapse an individual operation, click on the minus (-) sign preceding the operation.

¨ To collapse all operations for a solid, right-click on the solid, then choose Collapse all.

Duplicating solids

223
You can make exact copies of solids, including tool bodies. Each copy is an active solid that you can select
and edit.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select one or more solids to copy.

3. Right-click in the dialog box, then choose Duplicate Solid. Mastercam creates a copy of each
selected solid and lists the new solids at the end of the operation list in the Solids Manager.

Note: This function is particularly useful if you want to use the same tool body to affect different target
solids.

Editing solid parameters

You can edit the parameters that define a selected operation. Some of the original defining parameters,
however, may not be editable. For example, you cannot change an extrude, revolve, sweep, or loft
operation from a create to a cut or boss (or vice versa), but you can change any of these operations from a
cut to a boss (or vice versa)—provided the change would not create disjoint bodies. There are no
parameters to edit for Boolean and Trim operations.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the operation you want to edit, then double-click on Parameters.

3. Mastercam returns you to the dialog box or menu that is used to define the operation’s
parameters. Make changes to the parameters, as needed, then choose OK to close the dialog box or Done
to exit the menu.

4. Mastercam may require additional input, depending on the parameters that you edited. Follow the
prompts on your screen. After all required input has been entered, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Editing solid attributes

You can edit a solid’s attributes by accessing the Solid Attributes dialog box from the Solids Manager.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select a solid.

3. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Attributes. The Solid Attributes dialog box opens.

4. Change one or more attributes, as follows:

¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign, or choose Level to select a level using
the Level dialog box

224
¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign, or choose Color to select a color from
the Color dialog box.

¨ Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list.

¨ Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list.

5. Choose OK to apply the current Solid Attributes dialog box settings to the selected solid.

Notes:

¨ You can edit level and color attributes of a selected solid using the Attributes tab of the Analyze
dialog box.

¨ You can set default entity attributes using the Screen tab and the CAD Settings tab of the System
Configuration dialog box.

¨ If entities do not change color, it may be because selected entities are being displayed in a group
color instead of an entity color. (See Assigning a color to a group.) To apply the color change to
group/result entities, use the Screen, Clr function.

Recreating trimmed bodies

After a trim operation, you can recreate as brick solids the parts of the original solid that were trimmed
away and deleted from the drawing. The effect is the same as if you had turned on the Keep All option
during the initial trim operation.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select a trim operation.

3. Right-click on the selected item, then choose Recreate trimmed bodies. The Solids Manager dialog
box closes. After Mastercam completes the operation, the Solids Manager dialog box reopens and displays
the recreated solid bodies (bricks) in the history tree below the original solid.

Editing solid geometry

You can edit solid operations that are defined by geometry (i.e., chains, edges, etc.) Each solid operation is
associated with the solid on which the operation is performed. Changes that you make to an operation’s
geometry (adding selections, deleting selections, etc.) can affect the selected operation and its associated
solid only. Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or
solid, but does support creation of brick solids by Trim and Boolean (Remove, Common) operations.

Note: No geometry is editable for Boolean (Add, Remove, Common) or Primitive (Cone, Block, Cylinder,
Torus, Sphere) operations.

Editing chains for solid operations

Mastercam opens the Solid Chain Manager dialog box when you edit the geometry of an Extrude, Revolve,
Sweep, or Loft solid operation, since these operation types are defined by chains of curves. The dialog box
lists the chains that currently define the selected operation and gives you options for adding chains,

225
deleting chains, and rechaining one or all of the chains. To access these editing options, right-click on a
chain in the list.
Note: When you select a chain in the list, Mastercam highlights the corresponding chain in the graphics
window, which helps you identify chains to edit.

To add chains

1. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns you to the
graphics window.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager.
The new chains are reflected in the list.

To delete chains

¨ Right-click on the chain to delete, then choose Delete Chain.

To rechain a selected chain

1. Right-click on a chain in the list, then choose Rechain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics
window.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager.
The new chains replace the selected chain in the list.

To rechain all chains

1. Right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Rechain All. Mastercam returns you to the
graphics window.

2. Select one or more chains, then choose Done. Mastercam returns you to the Solid Chain Manager.
The new chains replace the chains that previously defined the operation.

Editing geometry for Extrude operations

You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define an extruded solid, cut, or boss. In addition, you can
edit the faces that an extruded cut or boss is trimmed to if the Trim to selected faces parameter was turned
on when the operation was initially defined. Steps for editing each of these components are given below.
To edit chains

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry - Chains.

Note: If the selected solid has only one geometry component, it will read ‘Geometry’.

3. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box:

¨ To add chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

226
¨ To delete a chain, right-click the chain to delete, then choose Delete Chain.

¨ To rechain a selected chain, right-click it in the dialog box, then choose Rechain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain, then choose Done.

¨ To rechain all of the chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Rechain All.
Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains,
then choose Done.

4. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager.

5. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves, which defines
the outer boundary, or cross-section, of the solid.

¨ The Extrude operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that
defines a closed boundary around the other chains. The chains that are nested within this boundary form
cutouts in the solid. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case.

¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

To edit faces

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and cancels the original face(s) to which
the boss or cut was trimmed.

3. Select one or more new faces, then choose Done.

Note: The faces that you select must be located on the solid with which the operation being edited was
originally associated.

4. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Editing geometry for Revolve operations

You can edit the underlying chains of curves that define a revolved solid, cut, or boss.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Revolve operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry.

227
3. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box:

¨ To add chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

¨ To delete a chain, right-click the chain to delete, then choose Delete Chain.

¨ To rechain a selected chain, right-click it in the dialog box, then choose Rechain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain, then choose Done.

¨ To rechain all of the chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Rechain All.
Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains,
then choose Done.

4. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager.

5. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves, which defines
the outer boundary, or cross-section, of the solid.

¨ The Revolve operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that
defines a closed boundary around the other chains. The chains that are nested within this boundary form
cutouts in the solid. You cannot use the thin-wall construction method in this case.

¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

¨ To edit the rotation axis of a revolved solid, cut, or boss, you must edit the solid’s parameters. See
the related topics below for more information.

Editing geometry for Sweep operations

Each Sweep operation has two editable geometry components: the underlying chains of curves (called
section chains) that define a swept solid, cut, or boss and the chain of curves (called a path chain) that
defines the path along which the section chains are swept to form the solid, cut, or boss. Steps for editing
each of these components are given below.
To edit the section chain

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Sweep operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Section Chain.

3. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box:

¨ To add chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

228
¨ To delete a chain, right-click the chain to delete, then choose Delete Chain.

¨ To rechain a selected chain, right-click it in the dialog box, then choose Rechain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain, then choose Done.

¨ To rechain all of the chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Rechain All.
Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains,
then choose Done.

4. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager.

5. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ You cannot delete the base chain. The base chain is the outermost chain of curves, which defines
the outer boundary, or cross-section, of the solid.

¨ The Sweep operation can have more than one chain only if there is an outermost chain that defines
a closed boundary around the other chains. The chains that are nested within this boundary form cutouts
in the solid.

¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

To edit the path chain

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Extrude operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Path Chain. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window in chaining mode.

3. Select a chain of curves to be used as the path chain.

Note: The selected chain must intersect the plane defined by the section chains.

4. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Editing geometry for Loft operations

You can edit the chains of curves that define the cross-sections of a lofted solid, cut, or boss.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Loft operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry.

3. Take one or more of the following actions from the Solid Chain Manager dialog box:

229
¨ To add chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Add Chain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains, then choose Done.

¨ To delete a chain, right-click the chain to delete, then choose Delete Chain.

¨ To rechain a selected chain, right-click it in the dialog box, then choose Rechain. Mastercam returns
you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the selected chain, then choose Done.

¨ To rechain all of the chains, right-click anywhere in the dialog box, then choose Rechain All.
Mastercam returns you to the graphics window. Select one or more chains to replace the original chains,
then choose Done.

4. Choose OK to close the Solid Chain Manager.

5. Mastercam returns you to the Solids Manager dialog box and marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Note: There must be a minimum of two closed, planar chains to define a lofted operation.

Editing geometry for Fillet operations

You can edit the edges that define a fillet operation.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Fillet operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges, faces, or the whole solid. Take one or both
of the following actions:

¨ To fillet additional edges, select unhighlighted edges, faces, or the whole solid.

¨ To remove filleting from edges, select highlighted edges, faces, or the whole solid.

Note: If the fillet operation is defined as a variable radius fillet, you will be able to select edges only.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

Editing geometry for Chamfer operations

You can edit the edges that define a chamfer operation.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

230
2. Expand the list of components for the Chamfer operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam maintains your original selection of edges, faces, or the whole solid. Take one or both
of the following actions:

¨ To chamfer additional edges, select unhighlighted edges, faces, or the whole solid.

¨ To remove chamfering from edges, select highlighted edges, faces, or the whole solid.

Note: If the chamfer operation is defined using two distances or a distance and angle, you will be able to
select edges and faces only, not the whole solid.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

Editing geometry for Shell operations

You can reselect the geometry that defines a shell operation.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Shell operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam cancels your original geometry selection. Redefine the shell operation by selecting new
faces and/or the whole solid.

Note: Your selections are restricted to the solid on which the selected shell operation was originally
defined.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ If you select individual faces on a solid, the system hollows the solid, opens the selected faces to
form entry holes into the solid, and thickens the remaining faces to form the solid’s shell. If you select a
whole solid body and no individual faces, the system removes the material from the interior of the solid,
which leaves a void, and thickens the solid’s faces to form the solid’s shell.

¨ Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.

Editing geometry for Trim operations

231
You can redefine the trimming geometry and direction of a Trim operation.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Trim operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Trim Solids menu.

3. Take one of the following actions to redefine the Trim operation:

¨ To trim the solid to a plane, choose Plane, then use the Define Plane menu to define a trimming
plane.

¨ To trim the solid to a surface, choose Surface, then select a trimming surface in the graphics
window.

¨ To trim the solid to a sheet, choose Sheet, then select an open sheet body in the graphics window.

4. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on a plane marker or surface in the graphics window. This
arrow points to the side of the surface on which the solids will not be trimmed and which retain the
history. Choose Flip, if necessary, to reverse the trimming direction.

5. To keep trimmed parts as bricks, set Keep All to Y. To remove trimmed parts from the drawing, set
Keep All to N.

Note: You can recreate trimmed parts as bricks at any time from the Solids Manager [Alt+Y].

6. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Mastercam marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ The trimming plane or surface must fully intersect the solid in order to trim it.

¨ If the solid is trimmed to a surface, the edges and faces that are created as a result of the trim
operation are associated with the surface. If you delete, move, or in any other way change the trimming
surface so that it no longer fully intersects the solid, Mastercam renders the trim operation invalid.

¨ You can trim a solid to multiple surfaces by first stitching those surfaces into an open sheet body
and then trimming to a sheet.

¨ When trimmed parts are kept in a drawing, the resulting disjoint pieces are represented as brick
solids with no history. The remaining solid (on the side with the direction arrow) maintains the history.

Editing geometry for Thicken operations

You can redefine the thickening direction of a Thicken operation.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

232
2. Expand the list of components for the Thicken operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Sheet Thickening Direction
menu.

3. Mastercam displays a direction arrow on the solid in the graphics window. This arrow points to the
side of the solid which is thickened. Choose Flip, if necessary, to reverse the thickening direction.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box. Mastercam marks the operation and its
corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your changes reflected in the model.

Editing geometry for Draft Face operations

The editable geometry components for a Draft Face operation vary depending on how the operation was
defined. Click on the topics below for more information.
Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference face

For Draft Face operations defined using a reference face (Draft to Face option on the Draft Face Parameters
dialog box), you can edit the drafted faces and the reference face. Steps for editing each of these
components are given below.
Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.
To edit drafted faces

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Take one
or both of the following actions:

¨ To draft additional faces, select unhighlighted faces.

¨ To remove draft from faces, select highlighted faces.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.
To edit the reference face

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Plane Face. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity
menu.

3. The original reference face has been cancelled. Select a new planar reference face. This face must
have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted.

233
4. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference face to indicate the draft
direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. If needed, choose
Reverse it to flip the draft direction, then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: The reference face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being edited.
Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are reflected in
the associated operation.

Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using a reference plane

For Draft Face operations defined using a reference plane (Draft to Plane option on the Draft Face
Parameters dialog box), you can edit the drafted faces and the reference plane. Steps for editing each of
these components are given below.
Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.
To edit drafted faces

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Take one
or both of the following actions:

¨ To draft additional faces, select unhighlighted faces.

¨ To remove draft from faces, select highlighted faces.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.
To edit the reference plane

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Plane. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Define Plane menu.

3. The original reference plane has been cancelled. Define a new reference plane. This plane must
have an intersection with the face(s) being drafted.

4. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow on the reference plane to indicate the draft
direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. If needed, choose
Reverse it to flip the draft direction, then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

234
5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: The reference plane that you define in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation being
edited. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face are
reflected in the associated operation.

Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using reference edges

For Draft Face operations defined using reference edges (Draft to Edge option on the Draft Face
Parameters dialog box), you can edit the drafted faces and the reference edges. Steps for editing each of
these components are given below.
Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.
To edit drafted faces

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Faces. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Take one
or both of the following actions:

¨ To draft additional faces, select unhighlighted faces.

¨ To remove draft from faces, select highlighted faces.

4. Choose Done.

5. Select one or more reference edges on the face that is currently highlighted in the graphics
window, then choose Done. The reference edges define the hinge points for the drafted face.

6. Mastercam cycles to the next face if more than one face was selected in step 3. Repeat step 5 for
each additional face. When you finish selecting edges for the last face, Mastercam reopens the Solids
Manager dialog box.

7. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Notes:

¨ When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.

¨ The reference edges that you select in steps 5 and 6 are associated with the Draft Face operation
being edited. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face
are reflected in the associated operation.

¨ When multiple edges are selected for a face, Mastercam attempts to break the original face into
multiple drafted faces, a separate face corresponding to each reference edge. This application of this draft
method has limited uses and fails if the edges overlap or turn back on themselves when looked at in the
draft direction, such as with a dovetail shape.

235
To edit the reference plane

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry – Direction. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity
menu.

3. The geometry that defined the original direction has been cancelled. Define a new draft direction
by selecting a linear edge or planar face.

4. Mastercam displays a cone-shaped graphic and arrow along the edge or on the face to indicate the
draft direction and how the inward/outward nature of the draft angle relates to the direction. If needed,
choose Reverse it to flip the draft direction, then choose Done to return to the Solids Manager dialog box.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: The linear edge or planar face that you select in step 3 is associated with the Draft Face operation
being edited. Changes that you make to the solid to alter the position or orientation of the reference face
are reflected in the associated operation.

Editing geometry for a Draft Face operation that was defined using an existing Extrude operation

For Draft Face operations defined using an existing Extrude operation (Draft Extrude option on the Draft
Face Parameters dialog box), you can edit the drafted faces.
Note: Mastercam does not support changes that would result in the creation of a new operation or solid.
To edit drafted faces

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Expand the list of components for the Draft Face operation you want to edit, then double-click on
Geometry. Mastercam returns you to the graphics window and displays the Pick Solid Entity menu.

3. Mastercam highlights the solid faces that are currently drafted for the selected operation. Take one
or both of the following actions:

¨ To draft additional faces, select unhighlighted faces.

¨ To remove draft from faces, select highlighted faces.

Note: All of the faces that you select must be lateral faces (walls) swept out from the extrude operation.

4. Choose Done to return to the Solids Manager.

5. Mastercam marks the operation and its corresponding solid dirty. Regenerate the solid to see your
changes reflected in the model.

Note: When you select multiple faces to draft, the operation fails if any one face fails to be drafted.

236
Highlighting solid operations

Highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with an operation. Mastercam uses the color red to
highlight the wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. You can highlight
operations automatically or manually. Click on the topics below for more information.
Note: Highlighting an operation is a useful way to check and be sure you have selected the correct
operation before editing it.

Highlighting solid operations automatically

The auto-highlight feature is an on/off toggle. When it’s on, Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the
wireframe geometry of the faces associated with the operation that’s currently selected in the Solids
Manager. Unlike manual highlighting, the geometry remains highlighted until you select a different
operation or close the Solids Manager dialog box.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Right-click anywhere in the operation list.

3. Auto-highlighting is turned on when there is a check mark next to the Auto-Highlight option and off
when there is no check mark next to the option. To change the status of the auto-highlight feature, choose
Auto-Highlight.

Note: When the auto-highlight feature is off, highlighting is disabled, but you can still highlight selected
operations manually. For more information, see the related topics below.

Highlighting solid operations manually

Manual highlighting is used to identify the geometry associated with a selected solid operation. It can be
used only when auto-highlighting is turned off. Mastercam uses the color red to highlight the wireframe
geometry of the faces associated with the selected operation. Unlike auto-highlighting, the highlighting
lasts for only a couple of seconds then disappears.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Right-click to select an operation, then choose Highlight. Mastercam highlights the corresponding
geometry in the graphics window.

Note: The Highlight option is grayed out if auto-highlighting is active. For information on turning off auto-
highlighting, see the related topics below.

Finding solid features

The Find Features function lets you find specified features, such as holes and fillets, on imported bricks or
other solid bodies whose base operation in the history is "Body.". When you select a feature to detect, you
can also tell Mastercam whether to remove detected instances of the feature or to recreate the operations
and any associated geometry needed to reconstruct the detected instances of the feature. Removing
features is useful when you need to create toolpaths that precede or ignore the features. Creating solid
operations adds them to the solid’s history tree, where they can be modified using the Solids Manager.
When you create operations, you can also tell Mastercam whether or not to combine appropriate
operations by combining selected chains (for holes) or edges (for fillets) into a single operation.

237
When operating on a brick, the Find Features function modifies the solid by removing features and adding
operations to its history, while maintaining the modified brick as a solid body at the top of the history tree.
The Find Features function only recognizes features on imported brick solids or on brick solids created in
Mastercam from stitching, Boolean, or trim operations. The Find Features function will not recognize solid
bodies with dirty, invalid, or suppressed operations.

Finding, removing, and creating fillets on a solid body

The Find Features function lets you detect, remove, and create constant-radius fillets on brick solids. Only
fillets whose radius falls within a specified range are detected. Combining operations fillets similar edges as
one operation in history.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Find features.

2. Select one or more solids in the graphics window, then choose Done. The Find Features dialog box
opens.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically, and this step is
unnecessary.

3. Under Feature, choose Fillets.

4. Indicate the type of function to perform:

¨ To recreate detected fillets as operations, choose Create operations.

¨ To remove detected fillets from the solid body, choose Remove features.

5. To specify the size of fillet to detect, accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and
Maximum Radius text boxes.

6. If you chose to create operations in step 4, indicate whether or not to combine operations, where
possible:

¨ To fillet similar edges as one operation, select Combine operations.

¨ To recreate each fillet as a separate operation, clear Combine operations.

7. Choose OK to perform the function.

Finding, removing, and creating holes on a solid body

The Find Features function lets you detect, remove, and create through holes and blind holes (pass through
solid in one direction) on brick solids. Only holes whose radius falls within a specified range are detected.
Combining operations aggregates multiple chains into one extrude cut operation.
When finding and recreating holes in a single face, Mastercam recognizes the contours of the face the hole
cuts through. If a hole cuts through multiple faces, Mastercam will try to extend one face and cap the hole
in a single plane. If Mastercam cannot recreate the hole, the operation fails.

238
1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Find features.

2. Select one or more solids in the graphics window, then choose Done. The Find Features dialog box
opens.

Note: If there is only one solid in the graphics window, Mastercam selects it automatically, and this step is
unnecessary.

3. Under Feature, choose Holes.

4. Indicate the type of function to perform:

¨ To recreate detected holes as extrude cut operations, choose Create operations.

¨ To remove detected holes from the solid body, choose Remove features.

5. To specify the size of hole to detect, accept or change the values in the Minimum Radius and
Maximum Radius text boxes.

6. If you chose to create operations in step 4, indicate whether or not to combine operations, where
possible:

¨ To combine operations on multiple chains into one extrude cut operation, select Combine
operations.

¨ To recreate each hole as a single-chain extrude cut operation, clear Combine operations.

7. If you chose to find holes in step 3, indicate whether or not to include blind holes:

¨ To detect blind holes (pass through solid in one direction only) as well as thru holes (pass
completely through solid), select Include blind holes.

¨ To exclude blind holes and detect only thru holes, clear Include blind holes.

8. If you selected Holes in step 3 and Create Operations in step 4, you can change default attributes of
new geometry created to reconstruct detected holes. Choose New Geometry Attributes to change one or
more attributes, as follows:

¨ Offset: Type the value of the offset—the distance of the new geometry from the outermost point
on the adjacent solid—you wish to use.

¨ Color: Type the number of the color that you want to assign, or choose Color to select a color from
the Color dialog box.

¨ Level: Type the number of the level that you want to assign, or choose Select to select a level using
the Level dialog box.

¨ Style: Select a line pattern from the drop-down list.

¨ Width: Select a line thickness from the drop-down list.

239
9. Choose OK to perform the function.

Checking solid models for errors

The Check Solid function analyzes solids for error conditions that may pose problems in solid modeling
operations. This function identifies and describes specific errors and highlights their location in the solid
drawing. This function is particularly useful for analyzing the integrity of imported solids and identifying
entities that you may need to repair or reconstruct. For example, with file formats in which healing during
import is supported, you may want to reimport the file with this feature turned on. Or you may use the
Remove Faces function to remove faces having problems identified by the Check Solid function in order to
reconstruct new surfaces, which can be subsequently stitched using the From Surfaces function.

You can access the Check Solids function from the Analyze Surfaces menu, from the Analyze Solid dialog
box, or from the Solids Manager.
Checking solids from the Analyze Surfaces menu

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Surfaces, Check Solid. The Check Solid dialog box displays.

2. Choose Perform Check.

3. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. If errors are detected, the Check Solid dialog box
redisplays and lists up to ten errors. If no errors are detected, a confirming message displays.

Checking solids from the Analyze Solid dialog box

1. Choose Main Menu, Analyze, Only, Solids.

2. On the Analyze Entity menu, make sure Edit is set to Y.

3. Select a solid entity in the graphics window. The Analyze Solid dialog box displays.

4. Choose Check Solid. If errors are detected, the Check Solid dialog box displays and lists up to ten
errors. If no errors are detected, a confirming message displays.

Checking solids from the Solids Manager

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Solids mgr or press [Alt+Y]. The Solids Manager dialog box opens.

2. Select a solid in the list.

3. Right-click on the selected solid, then choose Check Solid. If errors are detected, the Check Solid
dialog box displays and lists up to ten errors. If no errors are detected, a confirming message displays.

Notes on managing error display


When errors are listed in the Check Solid dialog box:

¨ Select a listed error to highlight its location in the graphics window.

¨ Choose Zoom to selected item to magnify the selected error in the graphics window.

240
¨ Choose Unzoom to return the graphics window to the original display scale.

¨ If ten errors are listed, you can reset Maximum number of errors to a higher value (default is 10)
and choose Perform Check see if there are more detectable errors.

Solid Drawing Layout

Use the Solid Drawing Layout function to create a layout of different part views (for example, top, side,
front, and isometric), arranged within a standard page. Mastercam automatically places the new drawings
on their own level, so you can easily keep them separate from your original part. Once you create the basic
layout from this dialog box, you can customize it further. You can use this function multiple times, for the
same solid or for different ones; each time you create a new layout, make sure you select a new level for it
(unless you want to replace an existing layout).

Choose any of the following to learn about the different dialog box options:

Paper size

Select any of the following paper sizes:

English Metric
A - 8.5 x 11 in. A4 - 210 x 297 mm
B - 11 x 17 in. A3 - 297 x 420 mm
C - 17 x 22 in. A2 - 420 x 594 mm
D - 22 x 34 in. A1 - 594 x 841 mm
E - 34 x 44 in. A0 - 841 x 1189 mm

You can also select Custom and type in your own dimensions.

Load border template

Select this option to add a border design, such as title blocks on the bottom or sides, to the layout. The
border design should be stored in the SHEETAS.MC9 file in the MC9\TITLE BLOCKS sub-directory. To change
the border design, edit this file.
If you leave this box blank, Mastercam will just draw a plain solid line matching the paper dimensions.

Suppress hidden lines

Select this option if you do not want hidden lines to show. You can change this later from the Solid Drawing
Layout menu.

Scale factor

You can have Mastercam automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. Use a scale of
less than 1 if all the drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected. Enter numbers as decimals: for
example, use .75, not 75%.
If you wish, you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu.

241
Layout view selection

Choose from four standard layouts:

¨ 4View DIN includes Bottom, Front, Left, and Isometric views.

¨ 4View ANSI includes Top, Front, Right, and Isometric views.

¨ 3View DIN includes Bottom, Front, and Left views.

¨ 3View ANSI includes Top, Front, and Right views.

Or choose User defined to create your own layout. Type up to 4 numbered views (separated by commas) in
the text box. Choose from the following:

1 – Top 5 - Right Side


2 – Front 6 – Left Side
3 – Back 7 – Isometric
4 – Bottom 8 – Axonometric
If you have created any custom graphics views in this file, you can select those as well.

Note: The Solid Drawing Layout function works on only one solid at a time.

Creating a drawing layout

Example

Follow these steps to create a drawing layout. When you finish, you will have multiple views of your part
laid out within a standard size page.

1. Choose Main Menu, Solids, Next menu, Layout. The Solid Drawing Layout dialog box opens.

2. Select a paper size.

3. Choose a paper orientation: Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide).

4. Indicate whether or not to apply a page border.

5. Indicate whether or not to display hidden lines in the solid drawing layout (you can change this
setting later):

¨ If you do not want to see hidden lines, select Suppress hidden lines.

¨ To see hidden lines, clear Suppress hidden lines.

6. Enter a scaling factor for the different views. The value you type in here will be applied to each of
the views. You can change this setting later.

7. Choose a layout view format.

242
8. Choose OK. The Levels dialog box opens.

Note: If Enter level in prompt area is selected in your screen configuration settings (choose Main Menu,
Screen, Configure, Screen tab), instead of opening the Levels dialog box, Mastercam prompts you to enter
a level in the prompt area.

9. Type a level number and, if desired, a name. Choose OK (or press [Enter] after each prompt area
entry).

Note: All of the entities in the drawing layout will be placed on this level. Make sure you select a level that
doesn’t already contain part information or geometry (any entities on the level will be deleted).

10. If your drawing contains more than one solid, you are prompted to choose one. When you click on
it, the layout is created.

11. The Solid Drawing Layout menu appears in the menu area. You can use it to customize or enhance
your drawing layout. This menu will be active until you choose Main Menu or Backup.

12. To exit Solid Drawing Layout, choose Main Menu or Backup, or press [Esc].

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

Tip: To hide your original part, choose Level. Find the level that contains the part, and click the red check
mark next to it so that the level does not display. You can also press [Alt+E] to display the Hide menu, then
choose All, Level and select the layout level in the Levels dialog box.

Example: Creating a drawing layout

Step-by-Step

Choose the Before button to see the sample part, a plate with a pocket and four mounting holes:

BEFORE

243
Choose the After button to see the drawing layout produced by the Solid Drawing Layout function. You can
see the original part in the lower corner. The lower-left corner of the paper boundary is automatically
placed at X0Y0, and the Gview automatically changes to Top. Click here to see the settings that were used
in the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box.

After

Customizing the drawing layout

Immediately after you create a drawing layout, the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. This menu gives
you options for customizing a layout drawing. While this menu is active, you can still use the toolbar or the
Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. If another Mastercam function displays a different
menu, you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears.
Choosing Backup or Main Menu, or pressing [Esc], while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid
Drawing Layout environment. Once you exit, you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu
again to edit the current drawing layout. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again, you will
create a new drawing layout, and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it.)

244
Solid : Creates a new drawing layout for a different solid, using the same setting as the current layout. You
may, however, place the new layout on a different level.
Note: After you use this command, other Solid Drawing Layout menu functions will apply only to the new
drawing layout and not to a previous one.

Hidden Lines : Displays the Hidden Lines menu, where you can change how hidden lines are displayed for
one or more of the views.

Paper Size : Changes the paper size.

Scale : Changes the scale of one or more views.

Chg view : Changes the orientation of a view (for example, Front to Side).

Pan : Moves a view from one point to another.

Rotate : Rotates the selected view, section, or detail by an angle you specify. Rotation is measured counter
clockwise.

Allign : Aligns a view along a vertical or horizontal axis.

Add/Remove : Creates and adds defined, custom detail, or cross-section views, or removes a view.

Reset : Opens the Solid Drawing Layout dialog box, where you can recreate the drawing layout, using
current or new settings.

Customizing the drawing layout

Immediately after you create a drawing layout, the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays. This menu gives
you options for customizing a layout drawing. While this menu is active, you can still use the toolbar or the
Secondary Menu to access other Mastercam functions. If another Mastercam function displays a different
menu, you can return to this menu by choosing Backup until it reappears.
Choosing Backup or Main Menu, or pressing [Esc], while this menu is active will cause you to exit the Solid
Drawing Layout environment. Once you exit, you will not be able to access the Solid Drawing Layout menu
again to edit the current drawing layout. (If you choose the Solid Drawing Layout function again, you will
create a new drawing layout, and all Solid Drawing Layout menu commands will apply to it.)

Changing the hidden lines display

Choosing the Hidden Lines option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you fine-tune how hidden lines
are displayed on your drawing layout.

245
1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Hidden lines. The Hidden Lines menu displays.

2. Choose one of the Hidden Line options:

¨ Choose One view to toggle the hidden lines display for a single view. You will be prompted to select
a view in the graphics window.

¨ Choose Toggle all to reverse the settings for all of the drawings.

¨ Choose Hide all or Show all to hide or show all hidden lines for all of the drawings in the layout.

3. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu, or choose Main Menu to
exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

Changing the paper size

Choosing the Paper Size option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a new paper size for
the drawing layout.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Paper size.

2. In the prompt area, type the letter code for the desired paper size or type Custom to enter your
own dimensions. Then press [Enter]. If you typed Custom, you will be prompted to enter an X and Y
dimension; press [Enter] after each entry.

The new page will still have its lower-left corner at X0Y0. The individual views will be redistributed evenly in
the new page.

3. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu, or choose Main Menu to
exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

Changing the scale

Choosing the Scale option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you select a different scale for one or
more views in the drawing layout.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Scale. The Scale menu displays.

2. Specify a scaling option:

246
¨ Choose Scale one to change the scale for a single view. When prompted, click on any point in the
desired view.

¨ Choose Scale all to change the scale for all the views.

3. Enter a scale amount in the prompt area and press [Enter]. Enter numbers as decimals: for
example, use .75, not 75%.

Note: The scale amount is always relative to the original size. For example, if you change the scale once to
.75, and then change it again and enter 1, the drawings will go back to their original size.

4. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu, or choose Main Menu to
exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

The scaled views are positioned at the center point of the original views.

¨ Use the Pan feature to move a single drawing to a desired point.

¨ Use the Align feature to align the drawings with each other, either horizontally or vertically.

Note: This command also works on cross-sections and detail views.

Changing the orientation of a view

Choosing the Chg View option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you change the orientation of one
of the views.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Chg view.

2. Select one of the views by clicking on any of its points or entities.

3. In the prompt area, type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. Use the same Gview
numbers as for custom layout selection.

4. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu, or choose Main Menu to
exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

Moving a view

Choosing the Pan option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you drag a single view to a new location.
You need to select one point in a view, and the entire view will move with it.

247
1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Pan. The Point Entry menu displays.

2. On any view, select a reference point to move from. Use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the
Point Entry menu to access additional point selection options.

3. Choose a destination point. The reference point you selected in step 2 will move here. You can
choose this point in two ways:

¨ Drag the mouse to a new point anywhere in the graphics window, and click at the desired point.

¨ Use the Point Entry menu to choose a point.

4. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu, or choose Main Menu to
exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

Rotating a view

Choosing the Rotate option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you rotate a view around its center
point.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Rotate.

2. Click anywhere on the desired view to select it.

3. Enter a rotation angle in the prompt area and press [Enter]. Use positive numbers only; the
rotation will be measured counter-clockwise.

4. Use the Pan or Align features to re-position the rotated drawing in line with the others.

Note: This command also works on cross-section and detail views.

Aligning views

Choosing the Align option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you line up a view along a vertical or
horizontal axis.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Align. The Point Entry menu displays.

2. Select a reference point, anywhere in the graphics window. Mastercam displays intersecting
horizontal and vertical axes that indicate where the selected views will line up.

Note: In this step and the next, you may use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the Point Entry menu to
access additional point selection options.

248
3. On any view outside the selected reference point, choose the point that you want to align to one of
the axes. Mastercam is smart enough to figure out whether it should align the view to the horizontal or
vertical axis.

4. Choose Backup or press [Esc] to return to the Solid Drawing Layout menu, or choose Main Menu to
exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment completely.

Important: Once you exit the Solid Drawing Layout environment, you will not be able to access the Solid
Drawing Layout menu again to edit this layout. (You can still use the regular Mastercam drafting and design
tools.)

Resetting a drawing layout

Choosing the Reset option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu displays the original Solid Drawing Layout
dialog box and lets you replace the current drawing layout with a new one based on the selections you
make.

Adding and removing views

Choosing the Add/Remove option from the Solid Drawing Layout menu lets you create and add new views
to your layout or remove existing views from your layout. You can add any or all of the following views:

¨ Currently defined graphics views

¨ Cross-section views of various orientations

¨ Detail views

When you use this menu option, you are no longer limited to four views. You can add as many new
elements as you wish.
When you choose Add/Remove, the Add/Remove menu displays. Click on the menu and topics below for
more information.

Add View : Adds a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout.

Add Section : Adds a cross-section view to the drawing layout. You can define a cross-section based on a
straight horizontal or vertical line through any point in the part, a zigzag cross-section, or a 3D plane.

Add Details : Creates detail drawings that zoom in on small sections of a part.

Remove : Removes an entire view, cross-section, or detail drawing.

249
Adding defined views

Use the Add View option to add a currently defined graphics view to the drawing layout.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Add/Remove, Add View.

2. In the prompt area, type the number of the new view and press [Enter]. The Parameters dialog box
opens.

Note: Use the same Gview numbers as the custom layout selection.

3. Select a color and scale factor for the new view and choose OK.

4. Select the location for the new view. You may use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the Point
Entry menu to access additional point selection options.

Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view.

5. Once you have added the new view, you can use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout.

Removing views

Use the Remove option to delete all of the entities associated with a particular view. Use it to delete any of
the original views or a view, section or detail that has been added.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Add/Remove, Remove.

2. Click anywhere on a view to remove it completely.

3. Choose OK when prompted to confirm the selection.

Important: You cannot use Mastercam’s Undo function to reverse this operation.

Creating and adding detail views

Example

Use the Add Detail option to zoom in on a section of a view and add a detail drawing to the layout.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Add/Remove, Add Detail. The Detail Type dialog box
opens.

2. Select the type of detail view to create:

¨ Circle

¨ Rectangle

3. Choose OK. The Point Entry menu displays.

250
4. Select the point you want to zoom in on. You may use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the Point
Entry menu to access additional point selection options..

Note: For a Circle detail, the point you select will be the center of the detail drawing. For a Rectangle
detail, the point will be one of the corners.

5. Drag the mouse to define the zoom area and click when you are done, or use the Point Entry menu
to choose a boundary point. The Parameters dialog box opens.

6. Select a color and scale factor for the section view and choose OK. The Point Entry menu displays

7. Select the location for the new view. You may use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the Point
Entry menu to access additional point selection options.

Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view.

8. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout.

Example: Adding a detail view

Step-by-Step

Choose the Before button to see part of a sample drawing layout. The focus of the detail is the bolt hole
indicated by the white circle:

BEFORE

Choose the After button to see the detail view created by the Solid Drawing Layout function. This example
shows a Circle detail. The selected point is on the rim of the bolt hole, which became the center of the
detail area. The example uses a scale of 2X, and a different color for clarity’s sake.

251
AFTER

Creating and adding section views

Examples

Use the Add Section option to define a cross-section view and add a drawing of it to your layout.

1. From the Solid Drawing Layout menu, choose Add/Remove, Add Section. The Section Type dialog
box opens.

2. Select an orientation for your cross-section:

Straight cross-sections

¨ Horizontal
The section is based on a horizontal line through the part at a point you select.

¨ Vertical
The section is based on a vertical line through the part at a point you select.

¨ 2 points
You are prompted to select two points on a view; the cross-section is based on the line through these
points.

252
Zigzag cross-sections

¨ Horizontal
You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. Each pair of points defines a horizontal segment of a
cross-section. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins; the second indicates where it
ends. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. You can have as many segments as you
wish.

¨ Vertical
You will be prompted to select several pairs of points. Each pair of points defines a vertical segment of a
cross-section. The first point of the pair indicates where a segment begins; the second indicates where it
ends. Mastercam automatically draws the connecting lines for you. You can have as many segments as you
wish.

¨ 3D Plane
You are prompted to define a cross-section plane, using the Define Plane menu and entering additional
information or points, as prompted.
Note that, unlike other cross-section methods, the plane is set with respect to the solid itself rather than
the graphics window.

3. Choose OK. Depending on your selection in step 2, the Point Entry or Define Plane menu displays.

4. Select the point (or points) or plane where you want the section to divide the part. The Parameters
dialog box opens.

Note: To select a point, use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the Point Entry menu to access additional
point selection options. To select a plane, use the Define Plane menu and enter additional information or
points, as prompted.

5. Select a color (Use this option to choose a color that will apply to just this operation. The color will
apply to all entities created as a result of this operation) and scale factor ( You can have Mastercam
automatically scale each view by the percentage you enter here. Use a scale of less than 1 if all the
drawings won't fit on the page size you have selected. Enter numbers as decimals: for example, use .75,
not 75%) If you wish, you can change the scale later from the Solid Drawing Layout menu.
for the section view and choose OK. The Point Entry menu displays.

6. Select the location for the new view. You may use the mouse to sketch a point, or use the Point
Entry menu to access additional point selection options..

Note: The point you select will be the center of the new view.

7. Use the Pan or Align features to fine-tune the layout.

Example: Adding a cross-section view

Step-by-Step

Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. The white circle shows the point that will be the
basis for the cross-section.

253
Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. A Horizontal line cross-section
was selected, based on the point shown above. In addition, a different color was specified. You can see on
the Top view where Mastercam drew an extra line to indicate the precise location and orientation of the
section; a corresponding line appears in the Side view at lower right.

After adding the section view, the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views.

254
Example: Adding a zigzag cross-section view

Step-by-Step

Choose the Before button to see a sample drawing layout. This example shows how to create a cross-
section that cuts through the boss and pocket on the upper-left of the part, then drops down to cut
through one of the bolt holes. The left-most white circle shows the start of the first segment. It continues
to near the "X", then drops down to the lower-right bolt hole.

Choose the After button to see the cross-section view that has been added. In the Top view, Mastercam
adds the lines showing the precise location of the cross section. Mastercam automatically draws a
bounding box around the cross-section.
After adding the section view, the Align feature was used to line it up with the other views.

255
Example: Adding a 3D-Plane cross-section view

Step-by-Step

This example shows a cross-section created by defining a plane. Choose the Before button to see a sample
drawing layout. This example replaces the side view on the lower right with a cross-section through the
boss and pocket. The white circle shows the approximate starting point of the cross-section.

Choose the Step 1 button to see the cross-section view that has been created. The cross-section is based
on an X=const plane, which cuts the cross-section through the YZ plane at whatever X value is specified; in
this example, X=1.25, which is about where the starting point is in the Before drawing.

256
Choose the After button to see how the original side view is replaced by the new cross-section. The
Remove command is used to delete the lower-right view, then the Pan command is used to move the new
section view to that location. Finally, the Align feature is used to line it up with the front view.

257

You might also like